Контроллер BSC 68p02902w76-b-02

SERVICE MANUAL
BSC2/RXCDR2
68P02902W76-B
68P02902W76-B
SERVICE MANUAL
BSC2/RXCDR2
GSM
Manual Revision
GMR-02
68P02902W76-B 28 Jul 2004
Motorola manual affected

This Manual Revision is applicable only to the manual number and version listed below:
68P02902W76-B Service Manual: BSC2/RXCDR2
Service requests
This revision provides a fix to the following service requests:
N/A
Reason for revision

This revision provides additional and updated information as follows:
Chap 1: New information on Overcurrent protection, pages 1–11 & 1–12.
Chap 2: Information on new fan unit, page 2–41.
Chap 2: Updates to Figure 2–22, page 2–59.
Chap 3: New information on GPROC3 board, page 3–42.
Chap 6: Information on replacing a new fan unit, pages 6–53 & 6–54.
Action
Remove and replace pages in the Manual as follows:
Remove Insert
All pages between the clear acetate All pages of the GMR between the
front sheet and the blank backing front sheet and the blank backing
sheet, remove from binder. sheet, insert into binder.
Obsolete pages
Destroy all obsolete pages. Do not destroy this page.
Completion
On completion of the Manual Revision, insert this Manual Revision sheet in the front or
back of the manual, for future reference.
Motorola service web

The Motorola Service Web at url: http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com/mysupport.asp
is updated to coincide with printed release of this GMR.
28 Jul 2004 Service Manual: BSC2/RXCDR2 GMR Page 1

68P02902W76-B
GMR-02
GSM
CD-ROM
The Motorola documentation CD-ROM that contains this manual will be updated to
include this GMR at the next issue after the printed release.
GMR Page 2 Service Manual: BSC2/RXCDR2 28 Jul 2004
68P02902W76-B
GMR-02
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2
© 2002-2004 Motorola, Inc. 68P02902W76-B

All Rights Reserved GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media.
Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including the exclusive right to
copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any copyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products
described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase
of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent
applications of Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Restrictions
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license agreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in
accordance with the terms of the agreement. Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of
the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language,
in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola.
Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions
in this document, or from the use of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve
reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to
notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein;
neither does it convey license under its patent rights of others.
Trademarks
Motorola and the Motorola logo are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc.
Intelligence Everywhere, M-Cell and Taskfinder are trademarks of Motorola Inc.
All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004

Table
of
Contents
Contents
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Issue status of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Version information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Resolution of service requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Feature references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Cross references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Data encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Text conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Reporting safety issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warnings and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Failure to comply with warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
General warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Specific warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
General cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Caution labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Specific cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Devices sensitive to static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Special handling techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Motorola manual set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Ordering manuals and CD-ROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
GMR amendment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
GMR availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
GMR instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
GMR amendment record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 1: Equipment overview and specifications

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
BSSC3 cabinet configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Digital equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Cabinet description - external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
68P02902W76-B i
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
External features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Cabinet description - internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Internal units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Overcurrent protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description

Cabinet components and subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Base station unit shelf assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
BSU3 numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
BSU3 shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
BSU3 shelf modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
RXU3 numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
RXU3 shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
RXU3 shelf modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Power distribution unit components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
PDU assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Input power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
DAB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
DAB2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
DAB2 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
S1 & S2 switch banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Alarm functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
EPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
EPSM view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
EPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
IPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
ii 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
IPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
IPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
IPSM2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
IPSM2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
IPSM2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
BSSC3 interconnect panel detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Connector details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Coaxial Interface Module (CIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
CIM connector designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Balanced line Interconnect Module 2 (BIM2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
BIM2 connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
BSSC3 cabinet cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
BSSC3 dc power distribution diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
BSSC3 signalling cabling diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
BSU3 and RXU3 to CIM or BIM2 connections diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Cabinet compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Introduction to cabinet compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Card cages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
BSSC3 cabinet labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Labelling diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Label descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Chapter 3: Digital modules

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
In this chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
BSU3 and RXU3 shelf diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
BSU3 shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
RXU3 shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Module front panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Full size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
BTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
68P02902W76-B iii
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Contents
BTC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

DSW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
DSW2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Timeslot interchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Local highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Remote TDM highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Expansion TDM highways. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Three party conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Self-diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Slot position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
GCLK module illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
GCLK description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
GCLK block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
GDP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
GDP2 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
MCU subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
DSP subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
E1 Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
CRC-4 Error checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Digital crosspoint switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
MCAP interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
GDP2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
GPROC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
GPROC2 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
GPROC2 module illustration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Troubleshooting and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
BSC2 GPROC2 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
RXCDR2 GPROC2 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
GPROC2 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
GPROC3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
GPROC3 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Troubleshooting and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
iv 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
BSC GPROC3 functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

RXCDR GPROC3 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
GPROC3 diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
KSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
KSW module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Timing reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Switchbound TDM interface structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Expansion switchbound highways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Timeslot interchange (TSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Connection RAM control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Three party conference (TPC) memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Fixed/dynamic pattern registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Outbound selection MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Highway monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Watchdog timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Interrupt logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Serial interface logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
KSW switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
KSW in a BSC2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
KSW in a RXCDR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
KSW block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Interconnected KSWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
MSI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Transcoded environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
MSI diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
GDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
GDP module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
MCU subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
DSP subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Subrate multiplexer modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
E1/T1 Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
CRC-4 Error checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Digital crosspoint switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
MCAP interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
GDP diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
NVM board description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Purpose of the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
Mechanical design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
NVM board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Interrogating the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
68P02902W76-B v
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Contents
Half-size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
CLKX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
CLKX module illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
CLKX block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
DSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
DSWX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
Block diagram of DSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
KSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
KSWX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
KSWX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
LANX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
LANX module illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
LANX description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
Local LAN data switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
Extended LAN data switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Bus arbiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Redundant LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Shelf ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
LANX block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
PIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
PIX module illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
PIX block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Chapter 4: Introduction to maintenance

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Related documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Access control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Introduction to general procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Test and repair equipment lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Test equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Repair equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
General repair procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
vi 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Site definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Man machine interface (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
MMI uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Locating faulty cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Required tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Connecting the LMT to a GPROC2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Setting up the MMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Changing the security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Identifying the faulty devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Equipment safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Checking the alarm status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Resetting and re-initializing a site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Chapter 5: Routine maintenance

Introduction to routine maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Air filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Air filter cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Cleaning cabinet air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Cleaning cabinet air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Performing a physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Cable tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Annual physical inspection checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Purpose of the annual physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Using the checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures

Introduction to FRU replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Chapter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Interface board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
68P02902W76-B vii
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Contents
BIM2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

CIM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Replacing an interface board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
CLKX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Replacing CLKX A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Replacing CLKX B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Non-redundant CLKX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Replacing the CLKX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Redundant GCLK module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Replacing a redundant GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Non-redundant GCLK replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Shelf configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Replacing a GCLK in a single shelf configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Replacing a GCLK in a multi-shelf configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Calibrating the GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
GCLK calibration record form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
GPROC2/GPROC3 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Redundant GPROC2 considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Non-redundant GPROC3 considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Device information required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Locating the faulty GPROC3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Removing the GPROC3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Installing the GPROC3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
GPROC3 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Redundant DSW2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
DSW2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Non-redundant DSW2 module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Redundant DSWX module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
DSWX illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
LED indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Replacing DSWX A or B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Non-redundant DSWX module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Redundant LANX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
viii 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
LANX module illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Replacing the LANX associated with the active LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Replacing the LANX associated with the standby LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Non-redundant LANX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
MSI replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
MSI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Non-redundant systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Redundant systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
GDP2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Non-redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
GDP2 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
NVM replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Diagnosing faults on the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Replacing the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
NVM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
PIX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
PIX module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Replacing the PIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Power supply module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Replacing a non-redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Replacing a redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Replacing a fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Fan module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Chapter 7: Non FRU replacement procedures

Miscellaneous repair procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Obtaining replacement authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Non-redundant KSWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Procedure 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Procedure 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Procedure 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Procedure 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Redundant KSWs.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Procedure 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
68P02902W76-B ix
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Contents
Replacing the alarm board (DAB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Removing the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
DAB2 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Installing a new board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Replacing the digital cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Removing the cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Installing the digital cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Chapter 8: Parts Information

BSSC3 cabinet parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Introduction to BSSC3 cabinet parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
FRU items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Ordering method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
BSSC3 parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
BSSC3 cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
BSSC3 cabinet FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
BSSC3 cabinet spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
BSSC3 cabinet cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
x 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
List
of
Figures
List of Figures
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Figure 1-1: BSSC3 cabinet (external view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Figure 1-2: BSSC3 cabinet (internal view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Figure 1-3: Graph showing trip characteristics of cabinet ECBs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Figure 2-1: BSU3 shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-2: RXU3 shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-3: BSSC3 PDU assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-4: DAB2 board (top side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-5: DAB2 Board bottom side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Figure 2-6: EPSM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Figure 2-7: EPSM block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Figure 2-8: IPSM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Figure 2-9: IPSM block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Figure 2-10: IPSM2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Figure 2-11: IPSM2 functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Figure 2-12: Fan assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Figure 2-13: Fan assembly location in the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Figure 2-14: BSSC3 cabinet interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Figure 2-15: Interconnect panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Figure 2-16: CIM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Figure 2-17: BIM2 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Figure 2-18: BSSC3 cabinet power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Figure 2-19: BSSC3 cabinet signalling cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Figure 2-20: BSU3 and RXU3 to CIM/BIM2 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Figure 2-21: RXU3 card cages installed in a BSSC2 cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Figure 2-22: BSU3 card cages installed in a BSSC3 cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Figure 2-23: BSSC3 internal cabinet labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Figure 3-1: BSU3 shelf layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-2: RXU3 shelf layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Figure 3-3: BTC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Figure 3-4: DSW2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Figure 3-5: DSW2 extended connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Figure 3-6: DSW2 expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Figure 3-7: GCLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Figure 3-8: GCLK block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Figure 3-9: GDP2 module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Figure 3-10: Front panel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Figure 3-11: GDP2 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Figure 3-12: GPROC2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Figure 3-13: GPROC2 block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Figure 3-15: GPROC3 block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Figure 3-16: KSW module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
68P02902W76-B xi
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
List of Figures
Figure 3-17: KSW block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Figure 3-18: KSW interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Figure 3-19: MSI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Figure 3-20: MSI block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Figure 3-21: GDP module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Figure 3-22: GDP module block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Figure 3-23: The NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Figure 3-24: CLKX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Figure 3-25: CLKX block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
Figure 3-26: DSWX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
Figure 3-27: Block diagram of DSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
Figure 3-28: KSWX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
Figure 3-29: KSWX block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Figure 3-30: LANX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Figure 3-31: LANX block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Figure 3-32: PIX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Figure 3-33: PIX block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Figure 4-1: BSU3 and RXU3 shelf layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Figure 6-1: BIM2 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Figure 6-2: CIM Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Figure 6-3: Clock Extender (CLKX) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Figure 6-4: GCLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Figure 6-6: DSW2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Figure 6-7: double kiloport switch extender (DSWX) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Figure 6-8: LANX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Figure 6-9: Multiple serial interface (MSI) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Figure 6-10: GDP2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Figure 6-11: NVM module details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Figure 6-12: PIX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Figure 6-13: EPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Figure 6-14: Typical fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Figure 7-1: Distribution alarm board (DAB2) connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
xii 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
List
of
Tables
List of Tables
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Table 1: Manual version history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Table 2: Service requests resolved in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Table 1-1: Cabinet dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Table 1-2: Environmental limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Table 1-3: Cabinet dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Table 1-4: Equipment weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Table 1-5: BSSC3 cabinet power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Table 2-1: BSU3 shelf module positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Table 2-2: BSU3 backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Table 2-3: RXU3 shelf module positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Table 2-4: RXU3 backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Table 2-5: Cabinet and DAB2 fuse LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Table 2-6: DAB2 Fan fuse LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Table 2-7: Fuse description and rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Table 2-8: DAB2 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Table 2-9: Pin usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Table 2-10: Pin usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Table 2-11: BSSC3 interconnect panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Table 2-12: Type 43 connector to D-type connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Table 2-13: BIM2 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Table 2-14: BSSC3 cabinet internal labelling details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Table 3-1: Module front panel status indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Table 3-2: GPROC2 device types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Table 3-3: GPROC3 device types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Table 3-4: TDM interface circuit actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Table 3-5: Multiplexer modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Table 3-6: EMON command results, depending on configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Table 4-1: General procedures sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Table 4-2: GSM test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Table 4-3: Repair equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Table 5-1: Replacement air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Table 5-2: Annual physical inspection checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Table 6-1: GPROC3 LED meanings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Table 6-2: DSWX LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Table 8-1: BSC2/RXCDR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Table 8-2: Adapter cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Table 8-3: BSSC3 FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Table 8-4: BSSC3 spares. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Table 8-5: Optical cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
68P02902W76-B xiii
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
List of Tables
This page intentionally left blank.
xiv 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
About
This
Manual

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
What is Covered In This Manual?

This manual contains technical descriptions of hardware elements, replacement procedures and parts lists
for the Motorola BSSC3 cabinet equipment. It includes information on hardware introduced to support
Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) speech.
The objectives of this manual are to help the reader:

• Gain an overview of the equipment and interconnection of components.
• Understand the function and operation of all components.
• Understand haw to inspect, maintain and repair the equipment.
• Be aware of the warnings (potential harm to people) and cautions (potential harm to
equipment) to be observed when working on the equipment.
For installation and commissioning information refer to Installation and Configuration:

BSC2/RXCDR2 (68P02902W77).
68P02902W76-B 1
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Issue status of this manual
Issue status of this manual

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
The following shows the issue status of this manual since it was first released.
Version information
The following table lists the versions of this manual in order of issue:
Table 1 Manual version history
Manual
Date of issue Remarks
issue
A 02 May 2003 Original issue.
B 13 Nov 2003 Includes hardware introduced to support Adaptive
Multi-Rate (AMR) speech .
Resolution of service requests
The following Service Requests are now resolved in this manual:
Table 2 Service requests resolved in this manual
Service GMR
Remarks
Request Number
N/A N/A Original issue
2 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
General information
General information
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
• Motorola disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or express, for any risk of damage, loss
or reduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the
customer, or any one acting on the customer’s behalf, to abide by the instructions, system
parameters or recommendations made in this manual.
• If this manual was obtained when attending a Motorola training course, it will not be updated
or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If it was supplied
under normal operational circumstances, to support a major software release, then corrections
will be supplied automatically by Motorola in the form of General Manual Revisions (GMRs).
Purpose
Motorola cellular communications manuals are intended to instruct and assist personnel in the operation,
installation and maintenance of the Motorola cellular infrastructure equipment and ancillary devices. It is
recommended that all personnel engaged in such activities be properly trained by Motorola.
Failure to comply with Motorola’s operation, installation and maintenance

instructions may, in exceptional circumstances, lead to serious injury or death.
These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by Motorola, although
they can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained through such training.
68P02902W76-B 3
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
General information
Feature references
Most of the manuals in the set, of which this manual is part, are revised to accommodate features released
at Motorola General System Releases (GSRn) or GPRS Support Node (GSNn) releases. In these manuals,
new and amended features are tagged to help users to assess the impact on installed networks. The tags are
the appropriate Motorola Roadmap DataBase (RDB) numbers or Research and Development Prioritization
(RDP) numbers. The tags include index references which are listed in the manual Index. The Index includes
the entry feature which is followed by a list of the RDB or RDP numbers for the released features, with
page references and hot links in electronic copy.
The tags have the format: {nnnn} or {nnnnn}
Where: is:
{nnnn} the RDB number
{nnnnn} the RDP number
The tags are positioned in text as follows:
New and amended feature information Tag position in text

New sentence or new or amended text. Immediately before the affected text.
Complete new blocks of text as follows: Immediately after the headings as follows:
• Full sections under a main heading. • Main heading.
• Full paragraphs under subheadings. • Subheading.

New or amended complete Figures and Tables After the Figure or Table number and before
the title text.
Warning, Caution and Note boxes. Immediately before the affected text in the box.
General command syntax, operator input or On a separate line immediately above the
displays (in special fonts). affected item.
For a list of Roadmap numbers and the RDB or RDP numbers of the features included in this software
release, refer to the manualSystem Information: GSM Overview (68P02901W01), or to the manual System
Information: GPRS Overview (68P02903W01).
Cross references
Throughout this manual, references are made to external publications, chapter numbers and section names.
The references to external publications are shown in italics, chapter and section name cross references
are emphasised blue in text.
This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, in turn, are divided into
sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually named at the top of each page, and are listed in
the table of contents.
4 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
General information
Data encryption
In order to avoid electronic eavesdropping, data passing between certain elements in the GSM and GPRS
network is encrypted. In order to comply with the export and import requirements of particular countries,
this encryption occurs at different levels as individually standardised, or may not be present at all in some
parts of the network in which it is normally implemented. The manual set, of which this manual is a part,
covers encryption as if fully implemented. Because the rules differ in individual countries, limitations
on the encryption included in the particular software being delivered, are covered in the Release Notes
that accompany the individual software release.
Text conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola cellular infrastructure manuals to represent keyboard
input text, screen output text and special key sequences.
Input
Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this.
Output
Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental
variables that appear on the screen are shown like this.
Special key sequences

Special key sequences are represented as follows:
CTRL-c Press the Control and c keys at the same time.

ALT-f Press the Alt and f keys at the same time.
¦ Press the pipe symbol key.
CR or RETURN Press the Return key.
68P02902W76-B 5
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Reporting safety issues
Reporting safety issues

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Whenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in all instances. Ensure that all site
personnel are familiar with this procedure.
Procedure
Procedure 1 Safety issue reporting

Whenever a safety issue arises:
1 Make the equipment concerned safe, for example by removing power.

2 Make no further attempt to adjust or rectify the equipment.
3 Report the problem directly to the Customer Network Resolution Centre, Swindon +44
(0)1793 565444 or China +86 10 88417733 (telephone) and follow up with a written
report by fax, Swindon +44 (0)1793 430987 or China +86 10 68423633 (fax).
4 Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the Customer Network
Resolution Centre.
6 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Warnings and cautions

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual and in all manuals of this
Motorola manual set.
Warnings
A definition and example follow below:
Definition of warning
A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life, physical injury, or ill
health. This includes hazards introduced during maintenance, for example, the use of adhesives and solvents,
as well as those inherent in the equipment.
Example and format
Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or data in/out connectors. Laser
radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre
optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
Failure to comply with warnings
Observe all warnings during all phases of operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment described
in the Motorola manuals. Failure to comply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in
the Motorola manuals, or on the equipment itself, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and
intended use of the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with
these requirements.
Cautions
A definition and example follow below:
68P02902W76-B 7
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Definition of caution
A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, software or individual items of equipment
within a system. However, this presents no danger to personnel.
Example and format
Do not use test equipment that is beyond its due calibration date; arrange for
calibration to be carried out.
8 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
General warnings
General warnings
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Observe the following specific warnings during all phases of operation, installation and maintenance of
the equipment described in the Motorola manuals:
• Potentially hazardous voltage.
• Electric shock.
• RF radiation.
• Laser radiation.
• Heavy equipment.
• Parts substitution.
• Battery supplies.
• Lithium batteries.
Failure to comply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorola manuals, violates
safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for
the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.
Warning labels
Warnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on the equipment. Personnel working with
or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any warning labels fitted to the equipment. Warning
labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.
Specific warnings
Specific warnings used throughout the GSM manual set are shown below, and will be incorporated into
procedures as applicable.
These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any other
warnings given in text, in the illustrations and on the equipment.
68P02902W76-B 9
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
General warnings
Potentially hazardous voltage
This equipment operates from a potentially hazardous voltage of 230 V a.c. single
phase or 415 V a.c. three phase supply. To achieve isolation of the equipment from
the a.c. supply, the a.c. input isolator must be set to off and locked.
When working with electrical equipment, reference must be made to the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989
(UK), or to the relevant electricity at work legislation for the country in which the equipment is used.
Motorola GSM equipment does not utilise high voltages.
Electric shock
Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until the electric circuit is broken.
Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself with dry insulating material and
pull or push the victim clear of the conductor.
ALWAYS send for trained first aid or medical assistance IMMEDIATELY.
In cases of low voltage electric shock (including public supply voltages), serious injuries and even death,
may result. Direct electrical contact can stun a casualty causing breathing, and even the heart, to stop. It
can also cause skin burns at the points of entry and exit of the current.
In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificial respiration. ALWAYS send for
trained first aid or medical assistance IMMEDIATELY.
If the casualty is also suffering from burns, flood the affected area with cold water to cool, until trained
first aid or medical assistance arrives.
10 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
General warnings
RF radiation
High RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in this equipment

when in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switched off when any
antenna connections have to be changed. Do not key transmitters connected
to unterminated cavities or feeders.
Relevant standards (USA and EC), to which regard should be paid when working with RF equipment are:
• ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz.
• CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields High Frequency (10
kHz to 300 GHz).
Laser radiation
Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors. Laser
radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre
optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
Lifting equipment
When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, a

competent responsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are
available. Where provided, lifting frames must be used for these operations.
When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, the competent responsible person
must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Where provided, lifting frames must be used for
these operations. When equipment has to be manhandled, reference must be made to the Manual Handling
of Loads Regulations 1992 (UK) or to the relevant manual handling of loads legislation for the country in
which the equipment is used.
68P02902W76-B 11
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
General warnings
Parts substitution
Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of

equipment, because of the danger of introducing additional hazards. Contact
Motorola if in doubt to ensure that safety features are maintained.
Battery supplies
Do not wear earth straps when working with stand-by battery supplies. Use
only insulated tools.
Lithium batteries
Lithium batteries, if subjected to mistreatment, may burst and ignite. Defective

lithium batteries must not be removed or replaced. Any boards containing
defective lithium batteries must be returned to Motorola for repair.
Contact your local Motorola office for how to return defective lithium batteries.
12 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
General cautions
General cautions
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment described
in the Motorola manuals. Failure to comply with these cautions or with specific cautions elsewhere in the
Motorola manuals may result in damage to the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customer’s
failure to comply with these requirements.
Caution labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any caution labels fitted to the
equipment. Caution labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.
Specific cautions
Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the text of this manual. These must be
observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any other cautions given
in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment.
Fibre optics
Fibre optic cables must not be bent in a radius of less than 30 mm (indoor) or 70
mm (outdoor).
Static discharge
Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices. These metal oxide semiconductor

(MOS) devices are susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. See the
section Devices sensitive to static in the preface of this manual for further
information.
68P02902W76-B 13
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Devices sensitive to static
Devices sensitive to static

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Certain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thin layer of insulation that is
susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Such a charge applied to the leads of the device could
cause irreparable damage.
These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing the hands into high insulation packing
material or by use of unearthed soldering irons.
MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leads short circuited together, for
example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or by inserting the leads into conductive plastic foam. Provided
the leads are short circuited it is safe to handle the device.
Special handling techniques
In the event of one of these devices having to be replaced, observe the following precautions when handling
the replacement:
• Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostatic point (ESP) on the
equipment.
• Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may be necessary to replace the
conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable the device to be fitted.
• Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. A cotton overall
is preferable.
• If possible work on an earthed metal surface or anti-static mat. Wipe insulated plastic work
surfaces with an anti-static cloth before starting the operation.
• All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placed on an earthed surface.
• Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitive devices. These
components may be providing protection to the device.
When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normally less susceptible to electrostatic
damage. However PCBs should be handled with care, preferably by their edges and not by their tracks and
pins, they should be transferred directly from their packing to the equipment (or the other way around) and
never left exposed on the workbench.
14 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Motorola manual set
Motorola manual set

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
The Motorola manual sets provide the information needed to operate, install and maintain the Motorola
equipment. Manuals for the GSM, GPRS and UMTS products are available on the following media:
• Printed hard copy.
• Electronic, as fully navigable PDF files on:

1 The Motorola customer support web site at:
(https://mynetworksupport.motorola.com/index.asp).
1 CD-ROM produced in support of a major system software release.
Each CD-ROM includes all manuals related to a specified main GSM, GPRS or UMTS software release,
together with current versions of appropriate hardware manuals, and has additional navigation facilities. A
snapshot copy of on-line documentation is also included, though it will not be updated in line with subsequent
point releases.
The CD-ROM does not include Release Notes or documentation supporting specialist products such as
MARS or COP.
Ordering manuals and CD-ROMs
Use the Motorola 68Pxxxxxxxx order (catalogue) number to order hard copy manuals or CD-ROMs.
All orders must be placed with your Motorola Local Office or Representative.
68P02902W76-B 15
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GMR amendment
GMR amendment
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Changes to a manual that occur after the printing date are incorporated into the manual using General Manual
Revisions (GMRs). GMRs are issued to correct Motorola manuals as and when required. A GMR has the
same identity as the target manual. Each GMR is identified by a number in a sequence that starts at 01
for each manual at each issue.
GMR availability
GMRs are published as follows:
• Printed hard copy - Complete replacement content or loose leaf pages with amendment list.
1 Remove and replace pages in this manual, as detailed on the GMR instruction sheet.
• Motorola service web - Updated at the same time as hard copies.
• CD-ROM - Updated periodically as required.
GMR instructions
When a GMR is inserted in this manual, the amendment record below is completed to record the GMR.
Retain the instruction sheet that accompanies each GMR and insert it in a suitable place in this manual for
future reference.
16 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
GMR amendment
GMR amendment record
Record the insertion of GMRs in this manual in the following table:
GMR number Incorporated by (signature) Date

01 Incorporated 09 Jan 2004
02 Incorporated (this GMR) 28 Jul 2004
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
68P02902W76-B 17
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GMR amendment
18 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Chapter
1
Equipment overview and specifications
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
68P02902W76-B 1-1
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Overview Chapter 1: Equipment overview and specifications
Overview
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
This chapter provides a general description and specifications of the Base Station System Control (BSSC3)
cabinet.
A BSSC3 cabinet can be configured as:
• A Base Station Controller 2 (BSC2) containing digital hardware modules configured to
control the radio subsystem.
• A Remote Transcoder 2 (RXCDR2) containing digital hardware modules configured to provide

an interface between the BSC2 and Mobile Switching Centre (MSC).
• A combination of the BSC2 and RXCDR2 functions.
The difference between the BSC2 and RXCDR2 configurations is in the complement of digital modules on
the backplane.
BSSC3 cabinets can be powered by positive earth IPSM2 modules (-48 V or -60 V) or negative earth
EPSM modules (+27 V) supply.
The information in this chapter applies to all three of the above configurations and, unless otherwise indicated,
to GSM, GSM850, extended GSM (EGSM), DCS1800 and PCS1900 systems.
1-2 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 BSSC3 cabinet configuration
BSSC3 cabinet configuration

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Configuration options
BSC2 configuration
The BSSC3 cabinet configured as a BSC2 contains at least one Base Station Unit 2 (BSU3) shelf assembly.
This assembly is in the lower part of the cabinet; the upper part of the cabinet can contain a second BSU3
configured either as a separate BSC2 or as an expansion of the BSU3 on the lower shelf.
Transcoding can be performed at the BSC2. In this case, the upper part of the cabinet contains a separate
transcoder unit (RXU3) shelf assembly instead of a second BSU3.
The top section of the cabinet contains the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) which consists of a Distribution
Alarm Board (DAB2) and a dc circuit breaker panel.
RXCDR2 configuration
The BSSC3 cabinet configured as an RXCDR2 contains at least one RXU3 shelf assembly, located in the
lower part of the cabinet. A second RXU3 can be located in the upper part of the cabinet.
The top section of the cabinet contains the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) which consists of a Distribution
Alarm Board (DAB2) and a dc circuit breaker panel.
BSU3 and RXU3 shelves

Each shelf in a cabinet can be configured as a separate network element.
The BSU3 and RXU3 shelf assemblies consist of:
• A backplane.
• Two vertical slot module shelves.
• A three compartment shelf.
The lower part of the two vertical slot shelves holds 26 full size digital modules in slots numbered L0 to L28.
The upper part of the shelf holds 28 half size digital modules in slots numbered U0 to U28.
There are three compartments at the bottom of the BSU3/RXU3 shelf assembly, with slide-in mountings for
power supply modules. The leftmost compartment is for an optional redundant power supply module.
When configured with EPSM or IPSM power supply modules, a minimum current of 10 A must
be drawn on the 5 V dc supply.
68P02902W76-B 1-3
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
BSSC3 cabinet configuration Chapter 1: Equipment overview and specifications
Location
The BSC2 cabinet can be located at the same site as a radio subsystem cabinet, or alternatively a BSC2 at one
site can control several radio subsystems at remote sites.
The transcoding function of the Base Station Subsystem (BSS) can be located either with the BSC2 or
remotely between the BSC2 and the MSC.
Transcoding carried out between the BSC2 and MSC is referred to as remote transcoding.
Digital equipment
The exact digital hardware module equipment in the cabinet depends on the BSS application. Chapter 3 of this
technical description section contains descriptions of the digital hardware modules used in the BSSC3 cabinet.
1-4 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Cabinet description - external
Cabinet description - external

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
This section describes the external appearance of a typical BSSC3 cabinet.
Dimensions
Table 1-1 gives the dimensions of the BSSC3 cabinet.
Table 1-1 Cabinet dimensions
Dimension Value
Height (Inc. feedthrough tubes) 2094 mm
Height (Excl. feedthrough tubes) 2064 mm
Width 715 mm
Depth (Inc. door) 416 mm
Depth (Excl. door) 395 mm
External features
The cabinet door is hinged on the left side of the cabinet, and has four air vents with grilles:
• Intake vents have air filters.
• Exhaust vents have exhaust fans fitted behind the vents.
All connections to the cabinet are at the interconnect panel, which is on top of the cabinet. This panel also
has feed-through tubes for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet cables in and out of the cabinet. All cabinets
are RF/EMI shielded.
68P02902W76-B 1-5
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Cabinet description - external Chapter 1: Equipment overview and specifications
External view
Figure 1-1 BSSC3 cabinet (external view)
INTERCONNECT PANEL
INTAKE AIR VENTS
DOOR EXHAUST AIR VENTS

HINGES
INTAKE AIR VENTS
EXHAUST AIR VENTS
1-6 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Cabinet description - internal
Cabinet description - internal

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
This section describes the internal appearance of a typical BSSC3 cabinet.
Internal units
As shown in Figure 1-2, the BSSC3 can contain two card cages, each with one full-size and one half-size
digital board shelf. A card cage can be configured as either a BSU3 or an RXU3. All cabinets contain a power
distribution unit PDU and a fan cooling system.
68P02902W76-B 1-7
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Cabinet description - internal Chapter 1: Equipment overview and specifications
Internal view
Figure 1-2 BSSC3 cabinet (internal view)
1-8 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Specifications
Specifications
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Environment
BSSC3 cabinet environmental limits are shown in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Environmental limits
Environment Temperature Humidity

Operating -5 °C to +45 °C 5% to 95% non-condensing
Storage -45 °C to +70 °C 8% to 100% non-condensing
Dimensions
The dimensions of the BSSC3 cabinet are shown in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3 Cabinet dimensions
Dimension Value
Height (Inc. feedthrough tubes) 2094 mm
Height (Not inc. feedthrough tubes) 2064 mm
Width 715 mm
Depth (Inc. door) 416 mm
Depth (Not inc. door) 395 mm
68P02902W76-B 1-9
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Specifications Chapter 1: Equipment overview and specifications
Weights
Table 1-4 details weights for BSSC3 hardware equipment.
Table 1-4 Equipment weights
Equipment Weight
BSSC3 136 kg (2 x BSU3/RXU3 cages)
Unequipped
BSSC3 230 kg
Fully equipped
Empty BSU3/RXU3 cage 16.25 kg
Power consumption
Maximum power consumption figures are theoretical values derived under extreme conditions
and are affected by variables such as temperature, component tolerances, transmission power
and supply voltage. Although these figures must be considered when planning site power
requirements, typical measured consumption values will be lower.
Table 1-5 shows the nominal and maximum power consumption figures for the cabinet.
Table 1-5 BSSC3 cabinet power consumption
Ambient temperature Nominal power consumption Maximum power

consumption
-5 to +45 °C 2050 W 2660 W
Power requirements
BSSC3 cabinets can operate from either positive or negative earth supplies (determined by customer request
and configured during initial build) at various voltages.
1-10 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Specifications
Positive earth BSSC3 cabinets

Positive earth BSSC3 cabinets operate from a -48 V or -60 V dc supply. The maximum power requirements
are:
• (-48 V) = 56 A.
• (-60 V) = 45 A.
Negative earth BSSC3 cabinets

Negative earth BSSC3 cabinets operate from a nominal +27 V dc (+3 V, -5 V dc) supply. The maximum
power requirement is:
• (+27 V) = 98 A.
Overcurrent protection
The cabinet overcurrent protection device can be:

• a fuse conforming to BS88 (IEC 51-3).
• a main circuit breaker conforming to BS EN 60898 (IEC 898).
• a main circuit breaker conforming to any of the following standards:

1 BS EN 60947–2/UL 489(a).
1 an equivalent, locally sourced protective device conforming to the applicable in-country

standards.
The cabinet protective device should allow for present and future load requirements.
The cabinet protective device must ensure that there is adequate trip-time
discrimination with the equipment circuit breakers (ECBs) within the BSSC3.
The cabinet ECBs are rated at 40A, with 125% instantaneous trip characteristic
(see Figure 1-3).
68P02902W76-B 1-11
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Specifications Chapter 1: Equipment overview and specifications
Figure 1-3 Graph showing trip characteristics of cabinet ECBs
1-12 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Chapter
2
BSSC3 cabinet description
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
68P02902W76-B 2-1
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Cabinet components and subsystems Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
Cabinet components and subsystems

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
This chapter gives a description of the Base Station System Control (BSSC3) cabinet components and
subsystems.
The following cabinet components and subsystems are described:
• BSU3 shelf assembly.
• RXU3 shelf assembly.
• Power Distribution Unit (PDU).
• Distribution Alarm Board 2 (DAB2).
• Enhanced Power Supply Module (EPSM).
• Integrated Power Supply Module 2 (IPSM2).
• Fan assemblies.
• Interconnect panel.
• CIM module.
• BIM2 module.
• BSSC3 cabinet cabling.
• BSSC3 cabinet labelling.
2-2 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Base station unit shelf assembly
Base station unit shelf assembly

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
A Base Station Unit (BSU3) shelf assembly consists of:

• A backplane.
• Two vertical-slot module shelves containing the required digital modules:

1 The upper shelf holds half size digital modules.
1 The lower shelf holds full size digital modules.
• A three-compartment shelf for the power supply modules.
Every cabinet must be fitted with the following digital cards:

• Two Bus Termination Cards (BTCs).
• Two Local Area Network extender (LANX) cards.
All other digital modules are optional, and their inclusion depends upon the cabinet configuration.
BSU3 numbering
In a BSC2, BSU3s are numbered from 0 forward using the 16 position (0 to F hex) rotary switch on the LANX
module. This rotary switch sets the BSU3 LAN address.
68P02902W76-B 2-3
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Base station unit shelf assembly Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
BSU3 shelf
Figure 2-1 BSU3 shelf

KS0 MS0
AI0
AI1
AI2
MS1
MS2
HALF SIZE
MODULES MS3
KS1
GK0
FULL SIZE
MODULES
BLANKING
PLATE
IPSM2 OR EPSM
2-4 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
BSU3 shelf modules
Table 2-1 shows the module positions in a fully equipped BSU3 shelf assembly.
If AMR modules are installed, in Table 2-1, where appropriate:

Read KSW as DSW2.
Read GDP as GDP2.
Read GPROC2 as GPROC3.
68P02902W76-B 2-5
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Base station unit shelf assembly Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
Table 2-1 BSU3 shelf module positions
Slot Half size modules Slot Full size modules

U0 KSWXL L0 BTC
U1 KSWXL L1 KSW
U2 KSWXR or CLKX L2
U3 KSWXR or CLKX L3 GCLK (note 1)
U4 KSWXR or CLKX L4
U5 KSWXR or CLKX L5 GCLK (note 1)
U6 KSWXR or CLKX L6 MSI or GDP (note 2)
U7 KSWXR or CLKX L7 MSI or GDP (note 2)
U8 KSWXE L8 MSI or GDP (note 2)
U9 KSWXE L9 MSI or GDP (note 2)
U10 Not used in this cabinet L10 MSI or GDP (note 2)
U16 PIX L16 MSI or GDP (note 2)
U17 PIX L17 MSI or GDP (note 2)
U18 PIX L18 GPROC2
U19 LANX L19 GPROC2
U20 LANX L20 GPROC2
U21 KSWXE L21 GPROC2
U24 KSWXR L24 GPROC2
U26 KSWXR L26 Spare or NVM
U27 KSWXR L27 KSW
U28 KSWXR L28 BTC
Notes: 1. GCLK modules take up two slots: L2 and L3, or L4 and L5.
2. Maximum six GDP modules in any MSI slot positions.
2-6 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Ventilation
Blanking plates are inserted in all unused full size and power supply module slots to assist with the correct
airflow and ventilation.
Backplane connectors
Table 2-2 shows the function of each connector fitted at the top of the BSU3 backplane.
Table 2-2 BSU3 backplane connectors
Connector Function
AI0 Serial bus primary (lower BSU3 only), to DAB2.
AI1 Serial bus redundant (lower BSU3 only), to DAB2.
KS0 TTY test connector, to KSW in slot L27.
GK0 GPS receiver connector, to interconnect panel on top of cabinet.
MS0 MSI connector, to interconnect panel CIM/BIM2 on top of cabinet.
68P02902W76-B 2-7
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
A remote transcoder unit (RXU3) shelf assembly consists of:

• A backplane.
• Two vertical-slot module shelves containing the required digital modules:

1 The upper shelf holds half size digital modules.
1 The lower shelf holds full size digital modules.
• A three-compartment shelf for the power supply modules.
Every cabinet must be fitted with:

• Two Bus Termination Cards (BTCs).
• Two Local Area Network extender (LANX) cards.
All other digital modules are optional, and their inclusion depends upon the cabinet configuration.
RXU3 numbering
In a RXCDR2, RXU3s are numbered 0 or 1 using the 16 position (0 to F hex) rotary switch on the LANX
module. This rotary switch sets the RXU3 LAN address.
2-8 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly
RXU3 shelf
Figure 2-2 RXU3 shelf
RXU3 shelf modules
Table 2-3 shows the module positions in a fully-equipped RXU3 shelf assembly:
If AMR modules are installed, in Table 2-3, where appropriate:

Read KSW as DSW2.
Read GDP as GDP2.
68P02902W76-B 2-9
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
Table 2-3 RXU3 shelf module positions
Parameter Valid Input Default Default

U0 KSWXL L0 BTC
U1 KSWXL L1 KSW
U2 KSWXR or CLKX L2
U3 KSWXR or CLKX L3 GCLK *
U4 KSWXR or CLKX L4
U5 KSWXR or CLKX L5 GCLK *
U6 KSWXR or CLKX L6 GDP or MSI

U7 KSWXR or CLKX L7 GDP or MSI
U8 KSWXE L8 GDP or MSI
U10 Not used in this cabinet L10 GDP or MSI
U16 PIX L16 GDP or MSI
U19 LANX L19 GDP or MSI
U20 LANX L20 GDP or MSI
U24 KSWXR L24 GDP, MSI or NVM
U27 KSWXR L27 KSW
U28 KSWXR L28 BTC
* GCLK boards take up two slots: L2 and L3, or L4 and L5.
2-10 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly
Ventilation
Blanking plates are inserted in all unused full size and power supply module slots to assist with the correct
airflow and ventilation.
Table 2-4 shows the function of each connector fitted at the top of the RXU3 backplane:
Table 2-4 RXU3 backplane connectors
Connector Function
AI0 Serial bus primary (lower RXU3 shelf only), to DAB2.
AI1 Serial bus redundant (lower RXU3 shelf only), to DAB2.
68P02902W76-B 2-11
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Power distribution unit components Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
Power distribution unit components

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
This section describes the cabinet dc power distribution arrangements.
Overview
The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) is located on the top shelf of the cabinet and:
• Distributes dc power throughout the cabinet.
• Provides an alarm interface.
It consists of:
• A Distribution Alarm Board 2 (DAB2).
• A circuit breaker panel containing six dc circuit breakers.
2-12 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Power distribution unit components
PDU assembly
Figure 2-3 BSSC3 PDU assembly
V IN (+27 V dc or
-48/60 V dc)
0V
INLINE FUSE
(10 A)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(40 A)
DAB2 BOARD
ti-GSM-BSC2/RXDCR2-00008a-v01-ai-sw
Input power
DC input power (-48/-60 V dc or +27 V dc) is applied at the interconnection panel on top of the cabinet
and is routed to:
• The V IN bus bar.
• The 0 V bus bar.
68P02902W76-B 2-13
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Power distribution unit components Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
Circuit breakers
Six circuit breakers distribute power to the PSMs within the cabinet. Access is provided by a cut-out in the
PDU front panel. The circuit breakers are grouped for the upper and lower cages as labelled, with a dedicated
circuit breaker for each PSU. Each circuit breaker is clearly identified by the front panel markings.
• The six circuit breakers provide:
1 -48/-60 V to the IPSMs/IPSM2s in a positive earth cabinet.
1 +27 V to the EPSMs in a negative earth cabinet.
Switching between a positive earth cabinet and a negative earth cabinet does not require any
reconfiguration within the power distribution area. Only the PSMs need to be changed
to the appropriate type.
2-14 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 DAB2
DAB2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
The Distribution Alarm Board 2 (DAB2):

• Distributes +27 V dc to the six fans within the cabinet via 6 fuses.
• Provides an alarming function for each of these fuses.
The DAB2 processes operational failure signals from:

• Ruptured fuses.
• The fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.
Location
The DAB2 is fitted in the PDU shelf, along side the circuit breakers, with the front face and LEDs viewable
when the cabinet door is open.
68P02902W76-B 2-15
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
DAB2 Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
DAB2 module
Figure 2-4 DAB2 board (top side)
SWITCH
BANKS
S2 S1
LEDs D43
FAN FUSE LEDs
D8 D32, D35, D38,
D41, D37, D33
DAB2 FUSES
F19, F21, F22,
F23, F24, F25,
F26
2-16 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
LED descriptions
Two bi-coloured LEDs (D43 and D8) are mounted on the DAB2 to indicate DAB2 and cabinet-based faults,
see Figure 2-4 and Table 2-5 for details.
The other six LEDs on the DAB2 board indicate fuse failures described in Table 2-6.
Table 2-5 Cabinet and DAB2 fuse LEDs
LED Description Colour Status Fuse Reference

D43 Cabinet Alarm OFFREDGREEN No power to N/A
Status boardAlarm
activeNo active
alarm
D8 DAB2 Fuse status OFFRED No power to F19
(Main DAB2 fuse boardOne or more (main DAB2
and fan fuses) GREEN fuses have blown supply)
(DAB2 fuse or any
fan fuse)All fuses
are intact
If the GPROC2 in the role of BSP (master GPROC2) is not running, both the above LEDs
will default to RED.
Table 2-6 DAB2 Fan fuse LEDs
Description LED Colour Status Fuse Reference

Fan 0 - Lower shelf D32 OFFRED Fuse intactFuse F26
blown/removed
blown/removed
blown/removed
Fan 0 - Upper shelf D41 OFFRED Fuse intactFuse F23
blown/removed
blown/removed
blown/removed
68P02902W76-B 2-17
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Fuse descriptions
Description and rating of the fuses associated with the DAB2 can be found in Table 2-7. All of the DAB2
fuses are accessible from within the cabinet, for replacement purposes.
Table 2-7 Fuse description and rating
Fuse reference Fuse function Current rating

F27 +27 V Input fuse 10 A
F19 +27 V DAB2 Incoming supply 0.5 A
F26 Fan 0 (lower cage) 2 A
F23 Fan 0 (upper cage) 2 A
2-18 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
DAB2 connectors
There are 5 cable connectors on the underside of the DAB2 board (see Figure 2-5). The connections are
detailed in Table 2-8.
Figure 2-5 DAB2 Board bottom side
+27 V INPUT PL4 NOT USED

CONNECTOR
(J1)
LOWER DIGITAL CAGE
CONNECTORS A10
(PL2) & A11 (PL3)
INTERNAL FUNCTIONS
CONNECTOR (PL5)
68P02902W76-B 2-19
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Table 2-8 DAB2 connectors
PCB connector
Connector Description Type Current rating
part number
J1 +27 V Feed from AMP 643411 2-way 19 A
input busbar Mate ’N’ Lock
PL2 Lower digital cage AMP 1-828590-0 10-way < 100 mA
- A10 IDC ribbon header
+ catches
PL3 Lower digital cage AMP 1-828590-0 10-way < 100 mA
- A11 IDC ribbon header
+ catches
PL4 NOT USED Unused Header 6-way < 100 mA
with latch
PL5 Internal functions AMP 640505-4 24-way 9 A
(fan power, alarms MPN
& +27 V dc DAB2 28-02888W05
power)
S1 & S2 switch banks
Switches S1 and S2 each consist of a bank of four switches. In the BSSC3 cabinet all eight switches must
be set to the OFF position.
Alarm functions
The DAB2 produces alarms for several different devices and modules:
• 7 fuses.
• Six fan alarms.
Each signal from the fuse alarms is at a nominal +5 V level and is brought to a TTL high level. Under no
fault conditions, the TTL output is held at a high level. If one or more fuses fail the associated LED and the
DAB2 fuse status LED will be ON, with the TTL output level going low.
2-20 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Communications
The DAB2 communicates with the master GPROC2 via the serial bus link. The master GPROC2 always
initiates communication, in which all modules respond with status reports on the serial bus.
The DAB2 processes operational failure reports from:
• Ruptured fuses.
• Fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.
The serial bus circuitry is powered by the same +5 V that powers each digital card shelf. This is supplied to
the DAB2 board via the serial link (A and B) cables from the lower digital card cage. The power supplies
that provide this +5 V (as well as +/-12 V) deliver isolated outputs. Thus all devices in the serial bus circuit
have a return that is floating (digital) earth relative to the cabinet (main) earth. However, many of the
signals being alarmed are referenced to cabinet earth.
Power
Mains power is present on the DAB2 connector until power is removed from
the cabinet.
The DAB2 board takes a direct feed from the V in busbar (DAB2 input J1). An in line cartridge fuse F27 is
fitted for protection.
This direct feed can only be used if the cabinet has a +27 V dc input. If the cabinet is powered from a -48/60
V dc supply, the DAB2 automatically switches from being powered by the +27 V dc from the busbar to being
powered from a +27 V dc feed from the lower card cage, via the fan cable loom.
The only changes to the power configuration required are the power supply modules changing from EPSMs to
IPSM2s.
68P02902W76-B 2-21
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
EPSM Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
EPSM
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
The Enhanced Power Supply (EPS) system for each BSU3 in a negative earth (+27 V) system consists of
up to three plug-in Enhanced Power Supply Modules (EPSMs). The EPSM can only be used in a negative
earth cabinet.
The EPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input power to the
following dc outputs:
• +5 V (+/-2% at 87.5 A).
• ±12 V (+/-5% at 2.5 A).
The BSU3 or RXU3 backplane connects the outputs of each EPSM in parallel.
When the cabinet is configured with EPSMs, a minimum current of 10A must be drawn on the 5V
line to avoid a low current trip.
When three EPSMs are fitted in the EPS system, they load share as follows:
• Two EPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped BSU3 or RXU3.
• The third EPSM (if fitted) provides n+1 redundancy.
When an alarm is generated in an EPSM, the alarm condition sends an alarm message to the master GPROC2
via the serial bus.
2-22 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 EPSM
EPSM view
Figure 2-6 EPSM module
25-PIN D-TYPE CONNECTOR

(FEMALE)
+5 V
+5 V
RTN (EARTH FOR +5 V OUTPUT)
C GND (CHASSIS EARTH)

V RTN (0 V INPUT)
V IN (+27 V INPUT)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN):

ON WHEN OUTPUT VOLTAGES
ARE PRESENT AND WITHIN
TOLERANCE.
ALARM LED (RED):

ON WHEN ONE OR MORE ALARM
CONDITIONS EXISTS.
OFF WHEN NO ALARM CONDITION
EXISTS.
ti-GSM-BSC/RXCDR-00036a-v01-ai-sw
68P02902W76-B 2-23
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
25-pin D-type connections

The 25-pin D-type connector provides connections for:
• +12 V power output.
• -12 V power output.
• Backplane slot ID input.
• Loss of dc input voltage alarm.
• Serial data bus.
• +5 V sense input.
Table 2-9 details the pin usage for the 25-way D-type connector.
2-24 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Table 2-9 Pin usage
Pin Usage
1 PSU Interlock
2 Chassis Earth
3 Serial_Data_B
4 Serial_Select_A
5 Slot ID 0
6 -12 V
7 0 V Common
8 0 V Common
9 +12 V
10
11 + Sense +5.1 V
12
13
14 PSU Interlock
15 PSU OK
16 Serial_Data_A
17 Slot ID 1
18 -12 V
19 0 V Common
20 0 V Common
21 0 V Common
22 +12 V
23
24 +5.1 V Load share control
25 - Sense +5.1 V
68P02902W76-B 2-25
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Functional description
Normal operation
During normal operation, the EPSMs share the load current demand of the BSU3 or RXU3 shelf modules:
• Half of the load current supplied by each EPSM in a two-EPSM system.
• One third of the load current supplied by each EPSM in a three-EPSM system.
Regulated dc power is applied to the backplane to power the BSU3 or RXU3 shelf modules.
Redundancy
Two EPSMs can provide adequate operating power for all modules in a BSU3 or RXU3 shelf. A third
EPSM can be added for redundancy.
When plugged into the backplane, all EPSM power outputs are connected in parallel, so that the EPS system
current capacity is twice that of the individual EPSM; any third EPSM is redundant (n+1).
Power supply shutdown

During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty EPSM, the output circuits of the malfunctioning EPSM are
isolated from the backplane output line, and the EPSM alarm LED is switched on. The malfunctioning EPSM
informs the master GPROC2 of the shutdown condition.
Monitoring circuits
Parallel output connections allow each EPSM to sense its own output lines for:
• Output voltage regulation.
• Overvoltage protection to shut the EPSM down if the output voltage exceeds 1.2 to 1.3
times the rated output.
• Overcurrent protection to latch the power supply off (after a short delay for large overloads) if
the output current exceeds:
1 1.15 to 1.5 times the full-load rating of the +5 V output.
1 1.15 to 2 times the full-load rating of the +12 V and -12 V outputs.
The BSU3 or RXU3 shelf master GPROC2 also monitors the status of each EPSM, via
a serial alarm link on the backplane, for:
• Loss of dc input voltage.
• Loss of output voltage.
• Overtemperature.
• Loss of serial link.
2-26 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Circuit protection
Additional internal EPSM circuit protection includes:
• Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent EPSM damage using an input series diode to
block reverse voltages.
• Thermal protection to send an alarm message to the master GPROC2 via the serial port, and
shut the EPSM down, if the EPSM ambient temperature exceeds a safe level.
After an alarm condition has ceased, normal EPSM operation is automatically restored.
Serial link
The serial link carries the following information and flags an alarm if an unexpected state or failure occurs:
• Address.
• Device location:
1 Slot 0 - 2.
• EPSM Revision.
• Alarms:
1 Input fail.
1 Output fail.
1 Overtemperature.
LEDs
Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the EPSM to indicate the following:
• Active (green): on when all output voltages are present and within specified limits.
• Alarm (red): on when one or more alarm conditions exist.
68P02902W76-B 2-27
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
EPSM diagram
Figure 2-7 shows the EPSM in block diagram form.
Figure 2-7 EPSM block diagram
2-28 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 IPSM
IPSM
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
The integrated power supply (IPS) system for each BSU3 or RXU in a positive earth (-48 V/-60 V) system
consists of up to three plug-in integrated power supply modules (IPSMs). The IPSM can only be used in
positive earth cabinets.
The IPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input power to the
• +27.5 V ± 5 % at 45 A (full-load current).
• +5.1 V ± 2 % at 87.5 A (full-load current).
• +12 V ± 5 % at 2.5 A (full-load current).
• -12 V ± 5 % at 2.5 A (full-load current).
The BSU3 or RXU backplane connects the outputs of each IPSM in parallel.
When the cabinet is configured with IPSMs, a minimum current of 10A must be drawn on the
5.1V line to avoid a low current trip.
When three IPSMs are fitted in the IPS system, they load-share as follows:
• Two IPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped BSU3 or RXU.
• The third IPSM provides n + 1 redundancy.
An IPSM in an alarm condition sends an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial bus.
68P02902W76-B 2-29
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
IPSM Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
IPSM view
Figure 2-8 shows the IPSM.
Figure 2-8 IPSM module

(FEMALE)
+5 V
+5 V
+27.5 V (RTN)
+27.5 V (OUTPUT)

V RTN (0 V INPUT)
V IN (-48 V/-60 V INPUT)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN):

ON WHEN ALL OUTPUT
VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT
AND WITHIN TOLERANCE
ALARM LED (RED):

ON WHEN ONE OR MORE ALARM CONDITIONS EXIST.
OFF WHEN NO ALARM CONDITION EXISTS .
25-pin D-type connections

The 25-pin D-type connector provides connections for:
2-30 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Normal operation
During normal operation, the IPSMs equally share load current demand of the BSU3 or RXU3 shelf modules:
• Half of the load current supplied by each IPSM in a two-IPSM system.
• One third of the load current supplied by each IPSM in a three-IPSM system.
Redundancy
Two IPSMs can provide adequate operating power for all modules in a BSU3 or RXU shelf. A third IPSM
can be added for redundancy.
When plugged into the backplane, all IPSM power outputs are connected in parallel, so that the IPS system
current capacity is twice that of the individual IPSM; any third IPSM is redundant (n+1).

During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty PSM, the output circuits of the malfunctioning PSM are
isolated from the backplane output line and the PSM alarm LED is on. The malfunctioning PSM informs
the GPROC/GPROC2 of the shutdown condition.
Monitoring circuits
Parallel output connections allow each IPSM to sense its own output lines for:
• Over-voltage protection to shut the IPSM down if the output voltage exceeds 1.2 to 1.3
times the rated output.
• Over-current protection to latch the power supply off (after a short delay for large overloads) if
1 1.05 to 1.3 times the full-load rating of the +5.1 V output.
1 1.05 to 2 times the full-load rating of the +12 V and -12 V outputs.
The BSU3 or RXU shelf’s GPROC/GPROC2 monitors the status of each IPSM via a serial
alarm link on the backplane for:
68P02902W76-B 2-31
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
IPSM Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
Circuit protection
Additional internal IPSM circuit protection includes:
• Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent IPSM damage using an input series diode that
blocks reverse voltages.
• Thermal protection to send an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial port, then
shut the IPSM down, if the IPSM ambient temperature exceeds a safe level.
After an alarm condition has ceased, normal IPSM operation is automatically restored.
Serial link
Address Device location Revision IPSM Alarms
Slot 0 - 2 I/P Fail

O/P Fail
Overtemp
LED display
Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the IPSM to indicate the following:
• Active (Green): on when all output voltages are present and within specified limits.
• Alarm (Red): on when one or more alarm conditions exist.
2-32 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
IPSM diagram
Figure 2-9 shows a functional diagram of the IPSM:
Figure 2-9 IPSM block diagram
68P02902W76-B 2-33
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
IPSM2 Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
IPSM2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
The Integrated Power Supply (IPS) system for each BSU3 or RXU3 in a positive earth (-48 V/-60 V) system
consists of up to three plug-in Integrated Power Supply Module 2s (IPSM2s), as seen in Figure 2-10. The
IPSM2 can only be used in positive earth cabinets.
The IPSM2 is a switching type dc to dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input power to the
• +27.5 V +/-5 % at 10 A (full load current).
• +5.1 V +/-2 % at 87.5 A (full load current).
• +12 V +/-5 % at 2.5 A (full load current).
• -12 V +/-5 % at 2.5 A (full load current).
The +27.5 V output of the IPSM2 is 275 W only, as transceivers are no longer
catered for in the BSSC3 cabinet.
The BSU3 or RXU3 backplane connects the outputs of each IPSM2 in parallel.
When three IPSM2s are fitted in the IPS system, they load share as follows:
• Two IPSM2s provide sufficient power for a fully equipped BSU3 or RXU3.
• The third IPSM2 provides n + 1 redundancy.
When an alarm is generated in an IPSM2, the alarm condition sends an alarm message to the master
GPROC2 via the serial bus.
2-34 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 IPSM2
IPSM2 module
Figure 2-10 IPSM2 module
+5 V (PS1)
+5 V (PS2)
(PS3)
(PS4)
25-WAY D-TYPE FEMALE

CONNECTOR (PS0)
+27.5 V (RTN) (PS53)

+27.5 V (OUTPUT) (PS52)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN):

ON WHEN ALL OUTPUT
VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT
AND WITHIN TOLERANCE
C GND (CHASSIS
EARTH) (PS7)
V RTN (0 V INPUT)
(PS6)
V IN (-48 V/-60 V
INPUT) (PS5)
ALARM LED (RED):

ON WHEN ONE OR MORE
ALARM CONDITIONS EXIST.
OFF WHEN NO ALARM
CONDITION EXISTS.
68P02902W76-B 2-35
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
25-way D-type connections

The 25-way D-type connector provides connections for:
Table 2-10 details the pin usage for the 25-way D-type connector.
2-36 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Table 2-10 Pin usage
Pin Usage
1 PSU Interlock
2 Chassis Earth
3 Serial_Data_B
4 Serial_Select_A
5 Slot ID 0
6 -12 V
7 0 V Common
8 0 V Common
9 +12 V
10
11 + Sense +5.1 V
12
13
14 PSU Interlock
15 PSU OK
16 Serial_Data_A
17 Slot ID 1
18 -12 V
19 0 V Common
20 0 V Common
21 0 V Common
22 +12 V
23
24 +5.1 V Load share control
25 - Sense +5.1 V
Normal operation
During normal operation, the IPSM2s equally share load current demand of the BSU3 or RXU3 shelf modules:
• Half of the load current supplied by each IPSM2 in a two IPSM2 system.
• One third of the load current supplied by each IPSM2 in a three IPSM2 system.
68P02902W76-B 2-37
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Redundancy
Two IPSM2s can provide adequate operating power for all modules in a BSU3 or RXU3 shelf. A third
IPSM2 can be added for redundancy.
When plugged into the backplane, all IPSM2 power outputs are connected in parallel, so that the IPS system
current capacity is twice that of the individual IPSM2; any third IPSM2 provides n+1 redundancy.

During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty IPSM2, the output circuits of the malfunctioning IPSM2 are
isolated from the backplane output line and the IPSM2 alarm LED will be on. The malfunctioning IPSM2
informs the master GPROC2 of the shutdown condition.
Monitoring circuits
Parallel output connections allow each IPSM2 to sense its own output lines for:
• Overvoltage protection, to cause an alarm and shut the IPSM2 down if the output voltage
exceeds:
1 +35 V +/-1.5 V for the + 27.5 V dc output.
1 +6.25 V +/-250 mV for the +5.1 V dc output.
1 +/-15 V +/-600 mV for the +/-12 V dc outputs.
• Undervoltage protection, to cause an alarm if the output voltage falls to:

1 +21 V +/-1 V for the +27.5 V dc output.
1 +4 V +/-500 mV for the +5.1 V dc output.
1 +/-9.6 V +/-600 mV for the +/-12 V dc outputs.
• Overcurrent protection to latch the power supply off (after a short delay for large overloads) if
1 1.05 to 1.3 times the full load rating of the +5.1 V output.
1 1.05 to 2 times the full load rating of the +12 V and -12 V outputs.
The BSU3 or RXU3 shelf master GPROC2 monitors the status of each IPSM via a serial
alarm link on the backplane for:
2-38 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Circuit protection
Additional internal IPSM2 circuit protection includes:
• Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent IPSM2 damage using an input series diode that
blocks reverse voltages.
• Thermal protection to send an alarm message to the master GPROC2 via the serial port, then
shut the IPSM2 down, if the IPSM2 ambient temperature exceeds a safe level.
After an alarm condition has ceased, normal IPSM2 operation is automatically restored.
Serial link
• Address.
• Device location: Slot 0 - 2.
• IPSM2 Revision.
• Alarms:
1 Input fail.
1 Output fail.
1 Overtemperature.
LEDs
Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the IPSM2 to indicate the following:
• Active (green): on when all output voltages are present and within specified limits.
• Alarm (red): on when one or more alarm conditions exist:

1 Overtemperature.
1 Input undervoltage alarm.
1 Output voltage failure.
68P02902W76-B 2-39
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
IPSM2 diagram
Figure 2-11 IPSM2 functional block diagram
2-40 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Fan cooling system
Fan cooling system

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
The cooling system for each shelf comprises a fan tray assembly, containing three exhaust fans. Cabinet
baffling divides the cabinet cooling system into upper and lower cabinet cooling sub-systems.
The cooling system, in conjunction with the correct use of shelf airflow deflectors, provides adequate
cooling for all cabinet equipment.
Each fan assembly (see Figure 2-12) has a fan stall sensor which is connected to alarm circuits in the DAB2
through 24-way connector PC5.
The fan cable loom also provides power to the fans in the upper and lower cage and +27.5 V dc to the
DAB2 board
The +27.5 V to the DAB2 board is provided from the lower cage. (Figure 2-22).
Figure 2-12 Fan assembly
68P02902W76-B 2-41
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Fan cooling system Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
Location
Each fan cooling sub-system is mounted directly below the associated BSU3/RXU3 shelf assembly in
the cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13 Fan assembly location in the cabinet
2-42 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Interconnect panel
Interconnect panel
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
The interconnect panel is mounted on the top of the BSSC3 cabinet and provides the access point for power
and signal cabling.
Connections on the interconnect panel (as shown in Figure 2-14) are provided for:
• DC input power.
• E1/T1 line interconnect modules.
• Customer defined alarm equipment input/output.
The Interconnect panel also has feed-through tubes for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet cables into and out
of the cabinet. These tubes are fitted with slit rubber caps designed to allow the fibre optic cables to be
passed through, while keeping foreign objects out.
The E1/T1 line interconnection modules are:
• Coaxial Interface Module (CIM).
• Balanced Interface Module (BIM2).
68P02902W76-B 2-43
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Interconnect panel Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
BSSC3 interconnect panel detail
Figure 2-14 shows the location of the connectors on the interconnect panel.
Figure 2-14 BSSC3 cabinet interconnect panel

DC INPUT POWER
E1/T1 (-48/60 V dc or E1/T1
INTERCONNECT +27.5 V dc) INTERCONNECT
MODULES MODULES
(CIM or BIM2) (CIM or BIM2)
EARTH STUD
CUSTOMER DEFINED
ALARM INPUT/OUTPUT
(PIX1 AND PIX2)
2-44 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Interconnect panel
Connector details
Table 2-11 shows the BSSC3 cabinet interconnect panel connector functions:
Table 2-11 BSSC3 interconnect panel connectors
Connector Function Internal destination External destination

MS0 to MS6 MSI ports (maximum six Corresponding MS E1/T1 line source or
E1/T1 per connector - connector on lower termination equipment
six Tx and six Rx) BSU3/RXU3 backplane (via a CIM or BIM2)
MS7 to MS13 MSI ports (maximum six Subtract 7 from the E1/T1 line source or
E1/T1 per connector - interface board number termination equipment
six Tx and six Rx) to identify corresponding (via a CIM or BIM2)
MS connector on upper
BSU3/RXU3 backplane
PIX1 and PIX2 End user alarm Edge connector of PIX End user alarm
input/output ports modules equipment
Panel layout
Figure 2-15 Interconnect panel layout
MS3 MS6 MS13 MS10

CIM or CIM or CIM or CIM or
BIM2 BIM2 BIM2 BIM2
MS2 MS5 MS12 MS9

CIM or CIM or CIM or
BIM2 CIM or
BIM2 BIM2 BIM2
MS1 MS4 MS11 MS8

CIM or CIM or EARTH CIM or CIM or
BIM2 BIM2 BIM2 BIM2
V IN 0 V STUD
-48/60 V dc
MS0 or +27 V dc MS7
CIM or CIM or
BIM2 BIM2
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES

FEED THROUGH TUBES
PIX 1 PIX 2
ti-UMTS-BSC2/RXDCR2-00005-v01-ai-sw
68P02902W76-B 2-45
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Coaxial Interface Module (CIM) Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
Coaxial Interface Module (CIM)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Location
The CIM module plugs into the BSSC3 interconnect panel via a 37-pin D-type connector. Up to 14 (MS0 to
MS13) CIM module can be accommodated on the interconnect panel.
Purpose
The CIM module (as shown in Figure 2-16) matches the impedance between the pulse code modulation
(PCM) circuit lines and the BSU3/RXU3 backplane. The board interfaces up to six input and six output
unbalanced coaxial 75 ohm 2.048 Mbit/s E1 lines to the BSU3/RXU3 backplane through twelve type 43
coaxial connectors.
The CIM module uses 12 transformers to provide impedance matching between the PCM circuit lines and the
multiple serial interface (MSI) modules. Each transformer has a 1:1.25 turns ratio to match the external 75 ohm
and backplane 120 ohm connections. Each input and output is isolated by up to 1500 V from the backplane.
2-46 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Coaxial Interface Module (CIM)
Use the CIM module for unbalanced lines.
Figure 2-16 CIM Module
1:1.25 TURNS RATIO

TRANSFORMER (X12)
37-PIN D-TYPE
CONNECTOR
TYPE 43 COAXIAL
CONNECTORS (X 12)
68P02902W76-B 2-47
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Coaxial Interface Module (CIM) Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
CIM connector designations
Table 2-12 details the designations of the CIM connectors.
Table 2-12 Type 43 connector to D-type connections
Type 43
D-type Pin D-type Pin Coaxial Pin
Function Coaxial Pin Function
no. no. no.
no.
J0-1 MSI_MEGA_Tx1+ J1 Centre J0-20 MSI_MEGA_Tx1- J1 Shield
(AC coupled to
earth)
J0-2 MSI_MEGA_Rx1+ J2 Centre J0-21 MSI_MEGA_Rx1- J2 Shield
(Earth)
(AC coupled to
earth)
(Earth)
(AC coupled to
earth)
(Earth)
(AC coupled to
earth)
(Earth)
(AC coupled to
earth)
(Earth)
(AC coupled to
earth)
(Earth)
Connector J0 pins 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34, and 37 are not used.
2-48 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Balanced line Interconnect Module 2 (BIM2)
Balanced line Interconnect Module 2 (BIM2)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Location
The BIM2 plugs into the BSSC3 cabinet interconnect board via a 37-pin D-type connector. Up to fourteen
(MS0 to MS13) BIM2 boards can be accommodated on the BSSC3 interconnect panel.
Purpose
The BIM2 (as shown in Figure 2-17) matches the impedance between the pulse code modulation (PCM)
circuit lines and the BSU/RXU3 backplane. The board provides interfaces for six input and six output
balanced 120 ohm E1/T1 lines via a 37-pin D-type connector, physically mounted on the opposite side to the
interconnect panel 37-pin D-type connector. It is recommended that screened twisted pair (STP) cables are
used for this purpose.
The board uses 12 transformers to match the impedance between the PCM circuit lines and the multiple
serial interface (MSI) modules. Each transformer has a 1:1 turns ratio to match the external and backplane
120 ohm connections.
68P02902W76-B 2-49
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Balanced line Interconnect Module 2 (BIM2) Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
Use the BIM2 for balanced lines.
Figure 2-17 BIM2 board
37-PIN D-TYPE E1/T1

LINE CONNECTOR
1:1 TURNS RATIO

TRANSFORMERS (X12)
37-PIN D-TYPE
INTERCONNECT
PANEL CONNECTOR
2-50 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Balanced line Interconnect Module 2 (BIM2)
BIM2 connectivity
Table 2-13 details the BIM2 D-type connector pin designations.
Table 2-13 BIM2 connectors
Pin no. Function Pin no. Pin no. Function Pin no.
J0-1 J1-1
MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA_Tx1+ J0-20 J1-20
MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA_Tx1-
J0-2 J1-2
MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA_Rx1+ J0-21 J1-21
MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA_Rx1-
J0-3 Earth J1-3 J0-22 Earth J1-22
J0-4 J1-4
J0-5 J1-5
J0-7 J1-7
J0-8 J1-8
J0-10 J1-10
J0-11 J1-11
J0-13 J1-13
J0-14 J1-14
J0-16 J1-16
J0-17 J1-17
J0-19 Earth J1-19
68P02902W76-B 2-51
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
BSSC3 cabinet cabling Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
BSSC3 cabinet cabling

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
BSSC3 cabinet cabling and connection diagrams shown in this section are:
BSSC3 dc power cabling diagram

This diagram is a schematic of the RXCDR2 cabinet power distribution.
BSSC3 signalling cabling diagram

This diagram is a signalling schematic for the RXCDR2 cabinet.
BSU3 and RXU3 to CIM or BIM2 connections diagram

This diagram shows the connectivity between BSU3 and RXU3 digital modules, and CIM or BIM2 boards.
2-52 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 BSSC3 cabinet cabling
BSSC3 dc power distribution diagram
Figure 2-18 BSSC3 cabinet power distribution
(Fuses located on DAB)

2 1 0
68P02902W76-B 2-53
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
BSSC3 signalling cabling diagram
Figure 2-19 BSSC3 cabinet signalling cabling
2-54 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 BSSC3 cabinet cabling
BSU3 and RXU3 to CIM or BIM2 connections diagram
Figure 2-20 shows an example of BSU3 and RXU3 shelf to CIM or BIM2 connections for a cabinet with
GDP/2 boards, installed in the RXU3 shelf.
Figure 2-20 BSU3 and RXU3 to CIM/BIM2 connections
LOWER SHELF UPPER SHELF

BSU3 RXU3 Backplane
Backplane MS7 E1 interconnect GDP/2 5
module (CIM/BIM2). SLOT L19
MSI 4 MS11 E1
SLOT L13
interconnect module GDP/2 4
MS0 E1 interconnect (CIM/BIM2), is used SLOT L20
MSI 2 module (CIM/BIM2). in addition to MS7
SLOT L15 when GDP2 boards GDP/2 3
SLOT L21
are fitted in RXU3
MSI 0 shelf. GDP/2 2
SLOT L17 SLOT L22
INTERCONNECT GDP/2 1
SLOT L23
PANEL
(TOP OF CABINET) GDP/2 0
SLOT L24
MS8 E1 interconnect
module (CIM/BIM2). GDP/2 11
MSI 5 SLOT L13
SLOT L12 MS12 E1
SLOT L14 when GDP2 boards GDP/2 9
are fitted in RXU3 SLOT L15
MSI 1 shelf.
SLOT L16 GDP/2 8
SLOT L16
GDP/2 7
SLOT L17
GDP/2 6
MS9 E1 interconnect SLOT L18
MSI 10
module (CIM/BIM2).
SLOT L7 MS13 E1
SLOT L9
when GDP2 boards GDP/2 13
are fitted in RXU3 SLOT L11
MSI 6
shelf. MSI 0
SLOT L11 SLOT L10
MSI 1
SLOT L9
MSI 2
MSI 11 SLOT L8
SLOT L6
MS3 E1 interconnect MS10 E1 interconnect MSI 3
SLOT L7
MSI 9 module (CIM/BIM2). module (CIM/BIM2).
SLOT L8
MSI 4
SLOT L6
MSI 7
SLOT L10
68P02902W76-B 2-55
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
The second connections from the RXU3 shelf GDP/2 slot positions are only used when GDP2
boards, NOT GDP boards, are fitted into these slots.
2-56 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Cabinet compatibility
Cabinet compatibility
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction to cabinet compatibility
The BSSC3 cabinet is designed to be compatible with the previous generation BSSC2 cabinet. This section
describes the extent of the compatibility and how it is achieved.
Card cages
RXU3 card cage (backwards compatible)

The new RXU3 card cage can be installed (retro-fitted) into an earlier BSSC2 cabinet. All power and
signalling connections are the same, except that the additional Fan Power Out connector is left unterminated
(see Figure 2-21).
BSU3 card cage (forwards compatible)

The earlier BSU2 card cage can be installed into a new BSSC3 cabinet. All that is required is an extra
cable loom to the lower card cage that connects +27 V from the +27 VOUT studs to the fan power loom
(see Figure 2-22).
68P02902W76-B 2-57
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Cabinet compatibility Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
Figure 2-21 RXU3 card cages installed in a BSSC2 cabinet
2-58 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Cabinet compatibility
Figure 2-22 BSU3 card cages installed in a BSSC3 cabinet
MS3 MS6 MS13 MS10

EARTH
MS2 MS5 STUD MS12 MS9
MS1 MS4 V IN 0V MS11 MS8

-48/60 V dc or +27 V dc
MS0 MS7
FIBRE OPTIC FEED
THROUGH TUBES
PIX 1 PIX 2 GK0
V IN BUS BAR 0 V BUS BAR
+27 V dc
POWER IN DAB2
CIRCUIT PL1 FAN POWER &
BREAKER ALTERNATE
PANEL fuse +27 V dc FEED
PC5
PC4 PC3 PC2
BSU CARD CAGE
PSU1 PSU2 PSU3
2 1 0 (Fuses located on DAB)
BSU CARD CAGE
PSU1 PSU2 +27V OUT PSU3
ti-GSM-BSC2RXDCR2-00062-v02-eps-sw.
68P02902W76-B 2-59
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
BSSC3 cabinet labels Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
BSSC3 cabinet labels

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
The warning, advisory and specific labels applied to the BSSC3 equipment cabinet are described here. Refer
to the labelling table for the key to the numbers on the diagram.
2-60 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 BSSC3 cabinet labels
Labelling diagram
Figure 2-23 BSSC3 internal cabinet labels
3 4
5
2 6
1 7
20
9
19 10
18
11
17
12
13
16 14
15
ti-GSM-BSC2/RXDCR2-00007-v01-ai-sw
68P02902W76-B 2-61
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
BSSC3 cabinet labels Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description
Label descriptions
Table 2-14 explains the labels on the labelling diagram.
Table 2-14 BSSC3 cabinet internal labelling details
Key Description Comments

1 Fuse and circuit breaker
designation
2 Serial number
3 Top panel component designation
4 CE mark/Safety IEC60950/Rating
label
5 Test stamp
6 Vendors kit number
7 Vendors serial number
8 Warning laser hazard
9 Caution isolate
10 Warning hot to touch
11 Half size module laser hazard Label on rear of half size module
12 ESP connection point
13 Caution isolate
14 Warning hot to touch
15 Lower cage card map
16 ESD and lower cage connectors
17 Warning laser hazard
18 Upper cage card map
19 ESD and upper cage connectors
20 DAB2 input power hazard label Indicates power on DAB2 until
(on DAB2 cover) power source is removed from
cabinet
2-62 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Chapter
3
Digital modules
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
68P02902W76-B 3-1
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Overview Chapter 3: Digital modules
Overview
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
This chapter describes the digital modules used in BSS equipment cabinets (BSC2 and RXCDR2).
The digital modules fit into the base station unit (BSU3) and remote transcoder unit (RXU3) shelves.
In this chapter
Do not fit digital modules in any equipment for which they are not suitable.
All information given is valid for GSM, EGSM, DCS1800 and PCS1900 systems unless otherwise indicated.
3-2 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 BSU3 and RXU3 shelf diagrams
BSU3 and RXU3 shelf diagrams

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
This section contains BSU3 and RXU3 shelf module assignments and associated information. Subsequent
sections in this chapter describe each module.
68P02902W76-B 3-3
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
3-4
BTC 0 RMT KSWX A4
BSU3 shelf
KSW A RMT KSWX A3

SPARE RMT KSWX A2
Figure 3-1
GPROC2 7 RMT KSWX A1
GPROC2 5 EXP KSWX A2
GPROC2 2 LANX A
GPROC2 1 LANX B
Read GDP as GDP2.

Read KSW as DSW2.
GPROC2 0 SPARE
BSU3 shelf layout

Read KSWX as DSWX.
GDP/MSI 0 SPARE
GDP/MSI 1
PIX 0
GMR-02
GDP/MSI 2 PIX 0
GDP/MSI 3
GDP/MSI 4
GDP/MSI 5
GDP/MSI 6
GDP/MSI 7
GDP/MSI 8 EXP KSWX B0
GDP/MSI 10 CLKXA0 EXP KSWX B1
GDP/MSI 11 CLKXA1 EXP KSWX B0

CLKXA2 EXP KSWX B1
If AMR modules are installed, in Figure 3-1, as appropriate:
GCLK A
CLKXB0 EXP KSWX B2
Figure 3-1 shows the BSU3 shelf slot assignment and backplane connectors.
CLKXB1 EXP KSWX B3

GCLK B CLKXB2 EXP KSWX B4
KSW B LCL KSWX A

BTC 1 LCL KSWX B
28 Jul 2004
68P02902W76-B
BSU3 module slots

• Slots are numbered from 0 to 28 from right to left.
• Half-size modules are fitted in the upper row.
• Full-size modules are fitted in the lower row.
• Master slots must be equipped first for initialization purposes:

1 Slot L5 GCLK.
1 Slot L20 GPROC2.
1 Slot L16 MSI.
1 Slot L27 KSW.
• All unused slots must be fitted with a blanking plate.
BSU3 backplane connectors

• AI0 and AI1 are 10-pin headers.
• AI2 is a 4-pin power connector to the back up supply (no longer used).
• KS0 and KS1 are 20-pin headers and provide TTY access to serial ports for KSW boards.
• GK0 is a 9-pin D-type and provides a GCLK synchronization input.
• MS0 to MS3 are 37-pin D-types for connecting E1/T1 circuits.
68P02902W76-B 3-5
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
3-6
BTC 0 RMT KSWX A4
RXU3 shelf
KSW A RMT KSWX A3
AI 2
AI 1
AI 0
Figure 3-2
GDP/MSI 0 RMT KSWX A0
GDP/MSI 1 EXP KSWX A2
KS 0
GDP/MSI 2 EXP KSWX A1
GDP/MSI 3
MS 0
EXP KSWX A0
GDP/MSI 4 LANX A
GDP/MSI 5 LANX B
Read GDP as GDP2.

Read KSW as DSW2.
GDP/MSI 6 SPARE
RXU3 shelf layout
MS 4
Read KSWX as DSWX.
GDP/MSI 7 SPARE
GDP/MSI 8
PIX 0
GMR-02
GDP/MSI 9 PIX 0
GDP/MSI 10
MS 1
GDP/MSI 11
GDP/MSI 12
GDP/MSI 13 MS 5
GDP/MSI 14
MS 2
GDP/MSI 17 CLKX A0 EXP KSWX B2
GDP/MSI 18 CLKX A1 RMT KSWX B0

CLKX A2 RMT KSWX B1
MS 6
GCLK A
CLKX B0 RMT KSWX B2
Figure 3-2 shows the RXU3 shelf slot assignment and backplane connectors:
CLKX B1 RMT KSWX B3

GCLK B CLKX B2 RMT KSWX B4
MS 3
KSW B LCL KSWX A

BTC 0 LCL KSWX B
KS 1
28 Jul 2004
68P02902W76-B
RXU3 module slots

• Slots are numbered from 0 to 28 from right to left.
• Half-size modules are fitted in the upper row.
• Full-size modules are fitted in the lower row.
• Master slots must be equipped first for initialization purposes.

1 Slot L5 GCLK.
1 Slot L25 GPROC2.
1 Slot L10 MSI, GDP.
1 Slot L27 KSW.
• All unused slots must be fitted with a blanking plate.
• AI0 and AI1 are 10-pin headers.
• AI2 is a 4-pin power connector to the back up supply (no longer used).
• KS0 and KS1 provide TTY access to serial ports for KSWs.
• MS0 to MS6 are 37-pin D-types for connecting E1/T1 lines.
68P02902W76-B 3-7
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Module front panels Chapter 3: Digital modules
Module front panels

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
This section is a quick reference guide to the status indicators and switches on the front panels of the digital
modules in BSU3 and RXU3 shelves. Subsequent sections in this chapter describe each module.
The reset switch on a module will not return a Disabled or Locked module to service. If the module was
B-U or E-U before the module was reset then it will return to an in-service state either Busy or Enabled.
Once a module is locked disabling the module will have no effect on the status of the module as displayed
via MMI, disabling a module results in isolating the module from the cage. Modules not listed below
have no status indicators or front panel switches.
Table 3-1 gives details of the status indicators found on module front panels, and what given indications mean.
Table 3-1 Module front panel status indicators
Module Status LEDs Front panel switches

GCLK Green lit: Master, no alarms. Toggle switch (three position)::
Red lit: Alarms, not master. Up (momentary) = Reset board.
Both lit: Master and alarms. Middle =Normal operation.
Both unlit: Not master, no Down =Disable board for
alarms (or no extraction.
power). Alarms:
oscillator or PLL Potentiometer = Adjustment for
failure, ref. counter the OCXO.**
overflow.
GPROC2 Green lit: Processor running, Toggle switch (three position)::
no alarms. Up (momentary) = Reset board,
Red lit: Processor halted or download code.
in reset. Middle = Normal operation.
Both lit: Processor running, Down = Disable board for
board is disabled or extraction.
other alarm.
Both unlit: No power to board.
Both flashing: Bootstrap
reprogram
in progress.
Cont.
3-8 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Module front panels
Table 3-1 Module front panel status indicators (Continued)

KSW Green lit: Processor running, Toggle switch (three position)::
other alarm.
MSI Green lit: Processor running, Toggle switch (three position):
other alarm.
GDP2 Green lit: Processor running, Toggle switch (three position):
no alarms. Up (momentary) = Reset board.
Red lit: Processor halted or Middle = Normal operation.
in reset. Down = Disable board for
Both lit: Processor running, extraction.
board is disabled or
other alarm.
KSWX Green lit: Master, no alarms. Toggle switch (three position):
Green flashing:Slave, no alarms. Up (momentary) = Reset board.
Green unlit: TDM bus or clock Middle = Normal operation.
alarms (or no Down = Disable board for
power). extraction.
NVM Board status LEDs: Toggle switch (three position):
Green lit: Processor running, Up (momentary) = Reset board.
no alarms. Middle = Normal operation.
Red lit: Alarms, board reset Down = Disable board for
or board awaiting extraction.
initialization.
Both unlit: Total power failure. Card swap switch:
Card status LEDs: Operation not currently supported.
Green lit: PCMCIA card
operational. Card eject:
Red lit: Fault on PCMCIA Operation not currently supported.
card.
Both flashing: Software writing
data to the card.
Both unlit: Card slot not in use.
Cont.
68P02902W76-B 3-9
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Module front panels Chapter 3: Digital modules
Table 3-1 Module front panel status indicators (Continued)

LANX None Rotary switch (16 position):
For setting shelf ID number.
PIX Green lit: =No alarms. None.
Green unlit: Customer alarm
detected.
3-10 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Full size modules
Full size modules

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
Full size modules fit into slots in the lower card cage of a BSU3 or RXU3 shelf. The slots are numbered
from L0 to L28 (right to left).
The following sections describe the full size modules that can be mounted in a BSU3 or RXU3.
The quantity fitted depends upon the specific configuration of the BSU3 or RXU3.
The modules
The following full sized modules are described:

• Bus terminator card (BTC).
• Generic clock (GCLK).
• Generic processor (GPROC2/GPROC3).
• Kiloport switch (KSW).
• Double kiloport switch (DSW2)
• Multiple serial interface (MSI).
• Generic DSP Processor (GDP/GDP2).
• Non Volatile Memory (NVM).
68P02902W76-B 3-11
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
BTC Chapter 3: Digital modules
BTC
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
The bus termination card (BTC) terminates the backplane to keep signals on a BSU or RXU3 shelf at
the proper TTL level.
The BTC terminates:
• Both MCAP buses.
• Both BSS serial buses.
• Both reference clocks.
• All TDM buses (Expansion, Remote and Local).
Requirements
Two BTC modules must be fitted in each BSU or RXU3 shelf, in slot L0 and slot L28, at all times.
While a faulty BTC is being replaced, another BTC must be fitted in a KSW slot to maintain the above
requirement.
3-12 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 BTC
BTC module
Figure 3-3 BTC module
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
68P02902W76-B 3-13
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
DSW2 Chapter 3: Digital modules
DSW2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
The double kiloport switch 2 (DSW2) module is a time division multiplex (TDM), multiple access digital
switch designed to support a non-blocking switching fabric. The DSW2 is compatible with legacy software,
and is interchangeable with the KSW.
The DSW2:
• Performs timeslot interchange for the active TDM highway.
• Communicates with the controlling GPROC2 or GPROC3 via the MCAP bus.
• At a BSC2, routes logical channels dynamically, on a per-call basis.
• At an RXCDR2 provides fixed switching for traffic between the BSC2 and MSC.
• Supports 3-party conferencing (TPC).
• Provides a range of diagnostic features.
• Provides expanded capacity via multiple-DSW2 configurations.
The DSW2 is shown in Figure 3-4.
3-14 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 DSW2
DSW2 module
Figure 3-4 DSW2 module
Backplane connector
Alarm (Red) LED.

Normally OFF
Active (Green) LED.

Normally ON
RESET/DISABLE
switch
68P02902W76-B 3-15
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Timeslot interchange
The primary function of the DSW2 is to switch data from a given timeslot on the active inbound (switchbound)
) TDM highway, to a given timeslot on the active outbound TDM highway. DSW2 switching at the BSC2 is
variable; physical channel mapping on the A interface is performed for each call, and at every handover.
DSW2 switching in an RXU3 shelf is fixed; it provides one-to-one physical mapping between the traffic to
and from the BSC2 and the traffic to and from the MSC.
The DSW2 can be configured to use the following TDM highways, according to requirements:
• Local TDM highway.
• Remote TDM highway.
• Three Expansion TDM highways.
These are described in the following sections.
Local highway
The Local TDM inbound highway uses the Local Highway 0 port on the DSW2. This port is used for
Highway 0 traffic within the same physical cage as the DSW2.
3-16 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Remote TDM highway
The Remote TDM inbound highway uses the Remote Highway 0 port on the DSW2. This port is used to
extend the switching functions of a local DSW2 to other cages. Since there is no increase in the number
of DSW2s, there is no expansion or increase in the switching capacity. Each remote cage is linked to the
primary cage by a fibre optic cable, via DSW extender modules. In the primary cage a Remote DSW
extender (DSWXR) module interfaces the fibre optic to the Remote TDM Highway. At each remote cage a
Local DSWX module (DSWXL), provides a Local TDM Highway within the cage. An example of a DSW2
extended to a second cage is shown in Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5 DSW2 extended connection
Inbound local Outbound highway

TSI
PRIMARY
BSU/RXU SHELF DSW2
DSWXR
Fibre optic cables
REMOTE
BSU/RXU SHELF Local TDM
DSWXL highway
68P02902W76-B 3-17
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Expansion TDM highways
Highways 1-3 are Expansion inbound TDM highways. These highways allow multiple DSW2s located in
different cages to be configured in parallel, via Expansion DSW extender (DSWXE) modules. Because the
number of DSW2s is increased, the available switching capacity is expanded accordingly. The three highways
enable up to four DSW2s to be connected in this way, including the DSW2 in the primary cage. An example
of three DSW2s connected in parallel is shown in Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-6 DSW2 expansion

TSI
2048 ports 2048 ports
Each DSW2 routes inbound data Expansion

to the TSI section and to the DSW2 outbound highway
expansion outbound highway is sent to each
DSWXE
DSWXE
BSU/RXU SHELF
DSWXE

TSI
TDM data is sent

to/from DSWXE to
DSWXE DSW2 Data from other
DSW2s is sent to
the TSI section
BSU/RXU SHELF DSWXE (2048 each)
Fibre optic cables
DSWXE

TSI
BSU/RXU SHELF
DSW2
All expansion
inbound data is DSWXE
sent (along with the
inbound local) to
the TSI for
switching to the
outbound highway DSWXE
3-18 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Outbound TDM highways

The RAM based Timeslot Assigner (TSA) generates output enables to select the inbound data for each
outbound timeslot. In this way the correct data to be sent outbound from the DSW2 is captured by selectively
enabling the outputs of all possible data sources.
The possible data sources encompass:
• Timeslot Interchange (TSI) data. This is the normal operating mode.
• Three-party Conference data.
• Fixed patterns for A-law and u-law idle channel codes.
• Dynamic and static patterns generated by the DSP for test purposes.
The DSW2 outbound highway interface itself comprises:

• Remote outbound highway. Used to extend the switching capacity to other cages, via DSWX
cards. Note that the switching capacity is extended, not expanded or increased.
• Local outbound highway. Used for traffic within the same physical cage as the DSW2. A
12-timeslot delay is introduced on this path to maintain timing alignment with the remote
outbound highway, which is subject to various TDM delays.
Double-rate TDM bus:The maximum outbound TDM highway bandwidth is 131.072 Mbit/s, partitioned into
2048 timeslots. This double rate TDM bus can be used when the DSW2 is configured in extended mode,
which allows the capacity to be shared between cages. Note that the backplane clock frequency is not
changed. Supported channel types include 64, 32, 16 and 8 kbit/s. The DSW2 therefore supports a maximum
of 2048 64kbit/s channels, 4096 32 kbit/s channels, 8192 16kbit/s channels, or 16384 8 kbit/s channels. One
TDM frame can contain any combination of these channels.
Standard-rate TDM bus: The DSW2 also supports a KSW mode of operation, for which the outbound
highway is partitioned into 1024 timeslots to provide a standard rate TDM bus. The potential bandwidth of the
outbound highway is thus halved in this mode of operation.
The usable switching capacity of each DSW2 depends on site hardware and software configurations because
certain modules require a number of ports for their own use. The DSW2 is controlled by the local GPROC2 or
GPROC3 via the MCAP bus.
Three party conference
Three party conference mode is effected by decoding and summing the timeslots of two A-law or two u-law
PCM-encoded channels. The summed data is then re-encoded/compressed, and selected as the data source for
the active outbound highway. A-law or u-law selection is not intended to change on a timeslot basis. The
DSW2 supports any number of three party conference calls, within its maximum channel capacity.
68P02902W76-B 3-19
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Self-diagnostics
Timeslot interchange: Fixed/dynamic pattern generation is used in conjunction with timeslot monitoring to
provide extensive self-diagnostics for the timeslot interchange section.
DSP: The DSP is monitored by a watchdog timer. The DSP writes to a memory-mapped address that
periodically resets the watchdog timer, ensuring that it does not time out. If the DSP stops running, the
watchdog timer times out and causes the red LED on the front panel to illuminate. An interrupt is also
generated and sent to the GPROC3 via the MCAP bus. If a DSP fails, the TSI section of the DSW2 still
switches data, but no new path connections are implemented. This results in existing calls being held while
the system is reconfigured around the failed DSW2.
Serial interface
The serial interface logic supports the TTY interface. This interface is connected to a dedicated backplane
connector port. This port is a buffered RS232 type. The TTY can be used to control the DSW2, monitor
DSW2 status, and support DSW2 diagnostics.
Slot position
The DSW2 is located in the following slots in a BSU or RXU3 shelf assembly:
• L1 for TDM highway B.
• L27 for TDM highway A.
3-20 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 GCLK
GCLK
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
The generic clock (GCLK) module generates all the timing reference signals that the BSU3 or RXU3 requires.
The master TDM clock is normally synthesized from a 16.384 MHz +/-0.05 ppm stable reference (temperature
stabilized crystal oscillator) and a 2.048 MHz or 1.544 MHz clock recovered from one of the E1 or T1 lines.
Requirements
The GCLK module fits in slots L3 and L5 in the BSU3 or RXU3 shelf assemblies. The module is two
slots wide and covers L2/L3 and L4/L5.
There must be a GCLK module in slot L5 of all BSU3 and RXU3 shelf assemblies.
A second GCLK module in slot L3 provides n + 1 redundancy.
Mutually redundant GCLKs must reside in the same BSU3 or RXU3.
68P02902W76-B 3-21
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GCLK Chapter 3: Digital modules
GCLK module illustration
Figure 3-7 GCLK module
BACKPLANE
ALARM (RED) LED, NORMALLY OFF

ACTIVE (GREEN) LED. MASTER = ON
E1/T1 IN
16.364 MHz OUT
6.12 s OUT
60 ms OUT
125 ms OUT
EARTH
FREQUENCY ADJUST
RESET/DISABLE SWITCH
ti-GSM-BSC2RXCDR2-00014-v01-jpeg-sw
3-22 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
GCLK description
The GCLK module generates all timing reference signals required by the BSS:
• 16.384 MHz TDM clock.
• 125 µs frame reference.
• 60 ms synchronization reference.
• 6.12 s superframe reference.
The GCLK is phase-locked to the recovered clock of a selected E1/T1 line from an MSI module. If the
recovered clock signal is lost, and no long term average (LTA) is available upon which to synchronize, then
the GCLK free-runs, providing reference stability better than 0.05 ppm. The LTA will be available for the
GCLK to synchronize as long as phase-lock was achieved for longer than 30 minutes.
The module incorporates self-diagnostics to detect and isolate board faults and to select a redundant board
in the event of module failure. When a redundant GCLK is present, the GCLKs operate in a master/slave
configuration with the slaved outputs synchronized to the master. If an error is detected, the clock control
circuit reverses the master/slave status of the two GCLKs. Fault status is reported to the main processor via
the MCAP bus.
A block diagram of the GCLK is shown in Figure 3-8 at the end of this section.
Reference oscillator
The reference oscillator uses a phase lock loop (PLL) and a frequency multiplier to synthesize 16.384 MHz
from a E1/T1 line. The PLL consists of:
• A digital phase detector.
• A loop filter.
• A ovenized controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO).
• A divide by eight loop divider.
If a fault is detected on the signal from both E1/T1 lines, the oscillator either uses the LTA (if available) or
free runs with stability being maintained by the VCXO.
Reference dividers
The 125 µs, 60 ms, and 6.12 s reference dividers consist of cascaded programmable binary counters to
divide the input signal to the correct output frequency. The reference dividers are synchronized to the
master clock. The output of each reference counter is routed to a multiplexer, which is used to switch the
reference output from the master or the slave GCLK. The output of each reference counter is also routed to
the reference encoder.
Reference encoders
The reference encoder encodes the reference signals together while maintaining phase relationships. The
encoded clock signals are routed via the backplane to a CLKX to be transmitted to other shelves at the site,
via fibre optic cables.
68P02902W76-B 3-23
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GCLK Chapter 3: Digital modules
Reference fail detect

The reference fail detect circuit monitors the signal on the two E1/T1 lines. Failures are reported to the clock
control/alarm logic. In the event of a reference failure, the GCLK either uses the LTA (if available) or selects
the secondary E1/T1 line reference. In either case an alarm is reported to the controlling GPROC2 via
the MCAP bus.
Clock control/alarm logic

The clock control/alarm logic determines the GCLK master/slave status based on module faults and GPROC2
commands, and reports the operational status to the GPROC2.
Buffered test ports

Buffered test ports are supplied on the front of the GCLK module for test and measurement of the input
reference signal and output clock and reference signals. The test jacks are recessed.
3-24 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
GCLK block diagram
Figure 3-8 GCLK block diagram
68P02902W76-B 3-25
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GDP2 Chapter 3: Digital modules
GDP2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
The Generic DSP Processor 2 (GDP2) module is a transcoder board that supports Adaptive Multi Rate (AMR)
speech, as well as data transcoding and rate adaption. The board supports 60 traffic channels, which can
be dynamically switched between half rate, full rate and enhanced full rate (EFR) speech. The board can
also be used to replace the GDP in an existing RXU backplane, in which configuration it supports a single
E1 line interface.
The GDP2 supports a redundant DSP block, which is transparently switched in the event of a single DSP
block failure. This significantly increases availability compared to the original GDP board.
The GDP2 module can be used only with systems running GSR7 software or later releases, as this
contains the necessary software support to allow operation.
For a BSC2 the transcoder boards it connects to must all
be GDP2, not XCDR.
The GDP2 module:
• Provides the transcoding interface to the MSC. The GDP2 module is located at the RXCDR2,
or at a BSC2 where transcoding is integrated within the BSC2.
• Interfaces two E1 serial lines to the internal cabinet TDM highway, which is in a parallel format.
• Transcodes 64 kbit/s data from the E1 lines, into 16 kbit/s or 8 kbit/s data., and vice versa.
Each GDP2 supports 60 compressed voice and data channels, using 8 + 1 DSPs. These channels, and the
synchronization and link control signalling channels, can be placed in any of the 1024 channels on the TDM
highway under control of the GPROC3.
Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1 serial data stream.
Two E1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1.
3-26 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 GDP2
Requirements
The GDP2 module is fitted in:

• Slots L6 to L17 (but maximum 6 modules in total) in the BSU shelf assembly.
• Slots L6 to L24 (maximum 19 modules) in the RXU3 shelf assembly.
An MSI-2 or GDP2 must be located in at least one of the BSU locations below for BSC2 initialization
purposes.
• Shelf 0 slot 16 (Software communicates via either group A or group B).
• Shelf 0 slot 14 (Software communicates via group A).
• Shelf 1 (if second BSU in BSC2) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A).
An RXU3 initialization uses slot 10 instead of slot 16, and slot 8 instead of slot 14.
Figure 3-9 shows a GDP2 module, with the front panel interface shown in Figure 3-10.
68P02902W76-B 3-27
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GDP2 module
Figure 3-9 GDP2 module.
Alarm (Red) LED. Backplane

Normally OFF Connector
Active ( Green) LED.

Normally ON
RESET/DISABLE
switch
3-28 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Figure 3-10 Front panel interface
GDP2 Fail LED
GDP2 Operational LED
Reset
Disable
Ethernet (RJ45)
Brief description
Refer to the GDP2 block diagram at the end of this section.

The GDP2 module contains a digital signal processor (DSP) unit that performs:
• GSM-defined speech encoding.
• GSM-defined speech decoding.
• Submultiplexing functions.
The speech transcoder bi-directionally interfaces the 64 kbit/s E1 line in the land network to the 13 kbit/s
vocoder format used on the air interface.
Signalling channels pass through the transcoder transparently.
68P02902W76-B 3-29
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Architecture
The GDP2 module contains the following major systems:

• MCU subsystem.
• DSP subsystem.
• E1 Line interface.
• Digital crosspoint switch.
• MCAP interface.
• TDM interface.
MCU subsystem
The main component of the processor system is the microcontroller unit (MCU), which
• Controls and interfaces the other major systems on the GDP2 module.
• Performs self-diagnostics and error monitoring.
Other components of the processor system are:

• A watchdog timer.
• 256 kbytes of RAM.
• 512 kbytes of Flash EPROM.
• 1 kbyte of dual port RAM for MCAP messaging.
• 1 kbyte of dual port RAM for TDM interface.
• A power monitor circuit.
The watchdog timer is periodically strobed by the MCU; an alarm is generated if it is not strobed before a
pre-set timeout.
3-30 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
DSP subsystem
The DSP subsystem consists of 8 identical blocks plus one redundant, each with:
• One 275 MHz DSP processor
• 256kB x 32 dedicated SDRAM for program and data storage.
• Two Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interfaces (ESSIs) for traffic.
• On-board phase-locked loops (PLL) to maintain a clock in the event that the 16.384 clock
input is lost. The PLL is designed to be stable enough to remain within range when the
clock input is restored.
DSP firmware is downloadable. The MCU uses the host port to connect to the parallel bus of all DSPs for
control, monitoring and download pc is nowpurposes. All the ESSI signals to the DSPs are buffered by
tristate devices.
Multiplexer
There is a multiplexer within the serial data formatter. The multiplexer converts data from the DSP subsystem
ESSI format to the digital crosspoint switch, ST Bus Format. This multiplexes four data streams from the
switch into a single datastream for the DSPs. Each DSP receives the same timeslot data . The software
running on the DSP maps which timeslot is to be transcoded by that DSP.
E1 Line interface
The line interface systems perform:

• Impedance matching.
• Secondary surge protection from high voltage transients (such as lightning strikes), which may
come down the E1 lines.
The impedance matching and isolation circuits consist of isolation transformers and Zener diodes.
After impedance matching and isolation each E1 line receive signal is input into a line interface unit/framer.,
which performs the clock recovery, data conversion, and framing.
The clock extraction section extracts the E1 clock to which all BSU/RXU3 shelves can be synchronized. The
framer performs frame decoding law CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment. Traffic
is then routed to the switching system.
The GDP2 provides a loopback from each line input to line output, for E1 link troubleshooting.
68P02902W76-B 3-31
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
CRC-4 Error checking
A GDP2 module configured for use with an E1 serial line supports CRC-4 error checking. This is set by
default to the on state 0. All associated switches (MSCs) must also have CRC-4 error checking set to the on
state, so allowing communication across the A-interface
To check if the GDP2 board CRC-4 state is set, use the MMS_config_type CM database command.
disp_element MMS_config_type <location>
Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference (68P02901W23) for information on the above
CM database command.
To ensure the correct setting of CRC-4 error checking at the MSC, consult the vendor supplied equipment
manual.
Digital crosspoint switch
The switching system consists of a digital switch, which performs the following functions:.
• Transmission of E1 line data and TDM data streams.
• Connection between the processor section and the E1 line interface system.
MCAP interface
The MCAP interface system supports two redundant MCAP buses to the GDP2. The GDP2 communicates
with the GPROC3 in the same way as all other full-size modules.
TDM interface
The TDM interface system takes traffic data from the TDM bus and converts it from parallel data to serial
data. The serial data is then sent to the switching system.
3-32 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
GDP2 diagram
Figure 3-11 shows a block diagram of the GDP2 module:
Figure 3-11 GDP2 block diagram
BACKPLANE
E1 Line E1 Line
Interface Interface TDM
Interface
ESSI
Test Port Digital Crosspoint MCAP
Switch Interface
Serial Data Formatters
ESSI ESSI MCU TTY A

Sub-System
SCI Mix
SCI
DSP
Sub-System TTY B
Host Bus
Traffic channel signalling & data 2048 kbit/s

Traffic channel data 8192 kbit/s
Data/Control
68P02902W76-B 3-33
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GPROC2 Chapter 3: Digital modules
GPROC2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
The GPROC2 generic processor module provides the processing power to control a BSC or RXCDR.
A GPROC2 cannot be used with software version less than GSR2 and must be used for software
version GSR4 and above.
GPROC2s in a BSU or RXU exchange control signalling in several ways:
• A token ring local area network (LAN) for communications with other GPROC2 boards. The
LAN can link processors in several shelves via fibre optic cable.
• A Motorola cellular advanced processor (MCAP) bus, which extends the processor address,
data and control buses to peripheral modules in the same shelf.
• A serial bus, which communicates alarm information between GPROC2s and half-size
modules. This serial bus extends to the power distribution unit.
• The Time Division multiplex (TDM) highway.
Requirements
The GPROC2 module fits into:

• Slots L18 to L25 in a BSU shelf assembly.
• Slot L25 and slot L26 in an RXU shelf assembly.
Each BSU/RXU requires at least one GPROC2.

A GPROC2 must be fitted in slot L20 or L24 in a BSC2.
3-34 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 GPROC2
GPROC2 description
The GPROC2 module contains:

• A Motorola MC68C040 32-bit processor operating at 33 MHz.
• The LAN processors, which are the interface between the GPROC2 and the token ring LAN.
• The COMM processor which, in conjunction with the TDM interface controller, is the interface
between the GPROC2 and the TDM highway.
68P02902W76-B 3-35
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GPROC2 module illustration
Figure 3-12 GPROC2 module
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
ALARM LED
(RED)
NORMALLY
OFF
ACTIVE LED
(GREEN)
NORMALLY ON
UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET
MIDDLE = NORMAL
OPERATION
DOWN = DISABLE
THIS OPTICALLY ISOLATED

TEST PORT ALLOWS
CONTROL OF ON BOARD
SELF DIAGNOSTICS.
3-36 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Communication
The GPROC2 communicates with other full size modules via the MCAP bus, and with half size modules (and
modules not on the module shelf) via the BSS serial bus.
The LAPD processor and the TDM interface controller communicate via a high speed private bus. The private
bus arbiter is the interface between the MC68LC040 address/data bus and the high speed private bus.
The parallel port controls output signals to the front panel LEDs, and receives input signals (via the register
ports) from the backplane. These contain:
• Shelf ID.
• Slot ID.
• Backplane type.
• Backplane revision level.
Memory
The GPROC2 module is equipped with 32 MBytes of DRAM and 1 MByte of EPROM. The EPROM
contains the bootstrap code.
Troubleshooting and diagnostics
An optically isolated TTY maintenance port is available on the front panel, to which a personal computer
(PC) can be connected. The TTY can be used for monitoring and controlling software when performing
maintenance or troubleshooting.
The maintenance port meets the requirements of the EIA RS232C and ITU-TSS V.24 specifications.
The GPROC2 runs on-board self-diagnostics during initial power-up and on command from the maintenance
TTY connection.
Software
Every GPROC2 is identical in terms of hardware; its function depends upon the software loaded into it.
The processor functions for BSC2 applications are different from those for an RXCDR2 application and
are described separately in the following sections.
68P02902W76-B 3-37
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
BSC2 GPROC2 functions
The GPROC2 performs the following processor functions:

• Fault Manager (FM).
• Configuration Manager (CM).
• Message Transfer Protocol (MTP).
• Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) State Machine (SSM).
• Radio Resource State Machine (RRSM).
• Cell Resource Machine (CRM).
• Switch Manager (SM).
• Connectionless Manager (CLM).
• Radio Subsystem (RSS).
• Operations and Maintenance System (OMS).
• Maintains a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.
GPROC2 task groups and device types

The processor functions can be grouped into six task groups depending on the software loaded into a given
GPROC2.
When a group of tasks is assigned to a GPROC2, it is considered to be a unique GPROC2 device type. The
exception to this is the code storage facility processor (CSFP), which is not considered to be a unique
device type.
Table 3-2 shows the device types and task groups.
3-38 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Table 3-2 GPROC2 device types
GPROC2 device BSC2 task groups BSC2/BTS interface

Type 0 N/A Motorola proprietary
Type1 Base Site Control Processor Motorola proprietary
(BSP)Link Control Processor
(LCP)
Type 2 Base Site Control Processor Motorola proprietary
(LCP)Operations and
Maintenance Processor (OMP)
A code storage facility processor (CSFP) can also be equipped.
RXCDR2 GPROC2 functions
The RXCDR2 GPROC3 processor functions are similar to those of the BSC2 GPROC2 and comprise:
These processor functions:

• Maintain the switch database for the KSWs.
• Maintain a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.
• Initialize the RXCDR2 network element.
• Maintain the configuration database.
• Communicate with other network elements via a 64 kbit/s LAPD serial data link.
• Communicate with the OMC via an X.25 link.
• Communicate with the local monitor via a man-machine interface (MMI).
• Communicate with collocated digital modules.
• Handle redundancy between duplicated modules.
• Control operational software downloads to digital highway modules such as MSIs and KSWs..
68P02902W76-B 3-39
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Fault manager
The RXCDR2 FM communicates with the BSS FM function via the optional transcoder BSC2 link (XBL), a
dedicated 64 kbit/s channel.
Switch manager
The SM:
• Makes connections between the terrestrial links on the A interface (MSC to BSS) and the
radio (traffic) channels on the air interface.
• Interacts with the call processing and fault management functions.
• Provides switching functionality for the BSS distributed within the BSC2.
Configuration manager
The CM maintains and updates a configuration database which contains all parameters and operational
software currently in use.
Changes to the database are restricted to the highest level password protection, due to the potential for down
time caused by incorrect changes to the configuration database.
3-40 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
GPROC2 block diagram
Figure 3-13 GPROC2 block diagram
68P02902W76-B 3-41
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GPROC3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
The GPROC3 generic processor module provides the processing power to control a BSC, RXCDR or
InCell BTS.
The GPROC3 is designed as a high performance direct replacement for GPROC2s and GPROC1s,
provided GSR6 (Horizon II) + Service Pack 1670.23, or later is installed. This software release
allows for any combination of GPROC types to be installed.
A GPROC3 cannot be used with software versions earlier than GSR6 (Horizon II) + Service
Pack 1670.23.
A GPROC3 in a BSU or RXU exchanges control signalling in several ways:
• A token ring local area network (LAN). The LAN can link processors in several shelves via
fibre optic cable.
• A Motorola cellular advanced processor (MCAP) bus, which extends the processor address,
data and control buses to peripheral modules in the same shelf.
• A serial bus, which communicates alarm information between GPROC3s and half-size
modules. This serial bus extends to the power distribution unit.
• The active time division multiplex (TDM) highway.
Requirements
The GPROC3 module fits into:

• Slots L18 to L25 in a BSU shelf assembly.
• Slot L25 and slot L26 in an RXU shelf assembly.
Each BSU/RXU cage requires at least one GPROC, which may be a GPROC1, a GPROC2 or a GPROC3,
depending on the cage and slot configuration.
A GPROC3 must be fitted in slot L20 or L24 in a BSC.
3-42 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Brief description
The GPROC3 module contains:

• A Motorola MC68060 32-bit processor operating at 64 MHz.
• The LAN processor which is the interface between the GPROC3 and the token ring LAN.
• The COMM processor which in conjunction with the TDM interface controller is the interface
between the GPROC3 and the TDM highway.
GPROC3 module
Figure 3-14 shows a GPROC3 module.
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
ALARM LED ACTIVE LED

(RED) (GREEN) RESET/DISABLE
SWITCH TTY CONNECTOR
(OPTICALLY ISOLATED
TEST PORT)
GREEN LED ON, RED LED = PROCESSOR RUNNING, NO FAILURES

GREEN LED OFF, RED LED ON = PROCESSOR HALTED, OR IN RESET
BOTH LEDS ON = PROCESSOR RUNNING, MODULE IS DISABLED OR OTHER ALARM
MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION
DOWN = DISABLE
68P02902W76-B 3-43
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Communication
The GPROC3 communicates with other full-size modules via the MCAP bus, and with half-size modules (and
modules not on the module shelf) via the BSS serial bus.
The LAPD processor and the TDM interface controller communicate via a high-speed private bus. The private
bus arbiter is the interface between the MC68060 address/data bus and the high-speed private bus.
The parallel port controls output signals to the front panel LEDs, and receives input signals (via the register
ports) from the backplane. These contain:
• Shelf ID.
• Slot ID.
• Backplane type.
• Backplane revision level.
Memory
The GPROC3 module is equipped with 128 MBytes of SDRAM and 16 MBytes of flash memory. The flash
memory contains the bootstrap code.
Troubleshooting and diagnostics
A fully buffered TTY maintenance port is available on the front panel, to which a personal computer
(PC) can be connected. The TTY can be used for monitoring and controlling software when performing
maintenance or troubleshooting.
The maintenance port meets the requirements of the EIA RS232C and ITU-TSS V.24 specifications.
The GPROC3 runs on-board self-diagnostics during initial power-up and on command from the maintenance
TTY connection.
Software
Every GPROC3 is identical in terms of hardware; its function depends upon the software loaded into it.
The processor functions for BSC applications are different from those for an RXCDR application and
are described separately in the following sections.
3-44 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
BSC GPROC3 functions
The GPROC3 performs the following processor functions:

• Message Transfer Protocol (MTP).
• Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) State Machine (SSM).
• Radio Resource State Machine (RRSM).
• Cell Resource Machine (CRM).
• Connectionless Manager (CLM).
• Radio Subsystem (RSS).
• Operations and Maintenance System (OMS).
• Maintains a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.
GPROC3 task groups and device types

The processor functions can be grouped into six task groups depending on the software loaded into a given
GPROC3.
When a group of tasks is assigned to a GPROC3, it is considered to be a unique GPROC3 device type. The
exception to this is the code storage facility processor (CSFP), which is not considered to be a unique
device type.
Table 3-3 shows the device types and task groups:
68P02902W76-B 3-45
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Table 3-3 GPROC3 device types
BSC
GPROC3 device BSC/BTS interface
task groups
Type 0 N/A Motorola proprietary
Type1 Base Site Control Processor Motorola proprietary
(LCP)
Type 2 Base Site Control Processor Motorola proprietary
(LCP)Operations and
Maintenance Processor (OMP)
A code storage facility processor (CSFP) can also be equipped.
RXCDR GPROC3 functions
The RXCDR GPROC3 processor functions are similar to the BSC GPROC3s and comprise:
These processor functions:

• Maintain the switch database for the KSWs.
• Maintain a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.
• Initialize the RXCDR network element.
• Maintain the configuration database.
• Communicate with other network elements via a 64 kbit/s LAPD serial data link.
• Communicate with the OMC-R via an X.25 link.
• Communicate with the local monitor via a man-machine interface (MMI).
• Communicate with collocated digital modules.
• Handle redundancy between duplicated modules.
• Control operational software downloads to digital highway modules such as MSIs, KSWs,
and XCDRs.
3-46 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Fault manager
The RXCDR FM communicates with the BSS FM function via the optional transcoder BSC link (XBL), a
dedicated 64 kbit/s channel.
Switch manager
The SM:
• Makes connections between the terrestrial links on the A interface (MSC to BSS) and the
radio (traffic) channels on the air interface.
• Interacts with the call processing and fault management functions.
• Provides switching functionality for the BSS distributed within the BSC.
Configuration manager
The CM maintains and updates a configuration database which contains all parameters and operational
software currently in use.
Changes to the database are restricted to the highest level password protection, due to the potential for down
time caused by incorrect changes to the configuration database.
68P02902W76-B 3-47
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GPROC3 diagram
Figure 3-15 shows a block diagram of the GPROC3 module:
Figure 3-15 GPROC3 block diagram
Processor
MC68060
64 MHz
Main SDRAM
(128 Mb)
+ 16 Mb Flash
3-48 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 KSW
KSW
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
The kiloport switch (KSW) module is a time division, multiple access digital switch that:
• Performs timeslot interchange for the active TDM highway.
• Communicates with the controlling GPROC2 via the MCAP bus.
• At a BSC2, routes logical channels dynamically, on a per call basis.
Requirements
The KSW module fits in the following slots in a BSU3 or RXU3 shelf assembly:
• L1 for TDM highway B.
• L27 for TDM highway A.
68P02902W76-B 3-49
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
KSW Chapter 3: Digital modules
KSW module
Figure 3-16 KSW module
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
ALARM (RED) LED,

NORMALLY OFF
ACTIVE (GREEN) LED,
NORMALLY ON
RESET/DISABLE
SWITCH
ti-GSM-BSC2RXCDR2-00018a-v01-jpeg-sw
3-50 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Architecture
Refer to the KSW block diagram (Figure 3-17) at the end of this section.
A Motorola MC56001 digital signal processor (DSP) controls the KSW internally. The DSP:
• Executes port connects between the switchbound TDM highway and the outbound TDM
highway.
• Controls the timeslot interchange (TSI) section via the connection RAM control section.
• Performs on-line and off-line self diagnostics, including:

1 Internal (KSW-related) tests.
1 External (TDM bus-related) tests.
• Controls inbound and outbound multiplexers.
• Processes alarms.
• Updates the dynamic pattern registers.
The DSP communicates via the MCAP bus interface logic, the DSP data/address bus, and the serial interface
logic.
Timing reference
The timing reference section generates various clock signals, timeslot counts, and frame counts required by
other sections of the KSW.
The TDM counters section is an offset counter that adds a fixed offset to the master TDM timeslot counter.
The GSM counters section contains four separate counters:
• GSM sub-timeslot counter.
• GSM sequence counter.
• GSM timeslot counter.
• GSM frame counter.
Switchbound TDM interface structure
The switchbound TDM highway interface consists of a series of multiplexers that are used to select one
of four switchbound highways (numbered 0 to 3). The DSP controls the switchbound multiplexers via
highway control logic.
Switchbound highway 0 and the outbound highway are split into local and remote parts.
68P02902W76-B 3-51
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Local
The local switchbound highway 0 and local outbound highways are active when the KSW is communicating
with highway interface modules in the same shelf.
Remote
The remote switchbound highway 0 and remote outbound highways are active when the KSW is
communicating with highway interface modules in remote shelves. This effectively extends the TDM bus to
multiple shelves. In the remote case, the KSW sends and receives TDM data to and from a remote KSW
Extender (KSWXR) in the same shelf as the KSW.
The remote KSWXR communicates via fibre optic links with a local type KSWXL in the remote shelf.
Local switchbound highway 0 has a delay circuit which adds a fixed 12 timeslot delay. This delay is equal
to the delay associated with the KSWX extension operation, and keeps the local and remote switchbound
highways in phase.
The modules on the TDM bus are:
• GDP.
• MSI.
• GPROC2.
Expansion switchbound highways
Expansion switchbound highway 1, 2 and 3 data originates from highway interface modules associated with
other KSWs. These remote highway interface modules send and receive data between their respective
KSWs. Each KSW re-transmits data received on its switchbound highway 0 (local or remote) to other KSWs
via dedicated KSWXE fibre optic links.
Data is received on switchbound highways 1, 2 and 3 of remote KSWs. This architecture results in each KSW
receiving data from all 1024 timeslots of all expansion highways connected to the KSW and retransmitting
that data on the 1024 timeslots associated with its own highway interface modules to the other KSWs.
The DSP can write data to any of the four switchbound highways. This allows known static data patterns to be
inserted into any switchbound timeslot, and data can be looped back to switchbound highway 0 from the TSI
section, enabling self diagnostics. When the KSW is performing self diagnostics, data is compared at two
highway monitors, one before the TSI section and one after the TSI section.
3-52 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Timeslot interchange (TSI)
The TSI section is the main section of the KSW. It switches data from a given timeslot on one of the four
switchbound TDM highways to a given timeslot on the outbound TDM highway. The TSI section consists of
four independent TSI blocks operating in parallel to support sub-rate switching. Each TSI block switches
16 kbit/s of data.
If a particular timeslot is associated with a 64 kbit/s channel, then one TSI block contains the same path
connection for that timeslot. Conversely, if a timeslot is associated with two 32 kbit/s channels, two TSIs
contain a similar path connection and the other two contain a different path connection. When a timeslot
contains four 16 kbit/s channels, each TSI section has a different path connection.
Connection RAM control
The connection RAM control is the interface between the DSP and the TSI section. The connection RAM
control isolates the DSP from strict timing constraints associated with the TSI section.
Three party conference (TPC) memory
After traffic data leaves the TSIs, it is sent to either the TSI mode multiplexer, which selects full-rate or
sub-rate switching as required, or to the three party conference (TPC) memory section. The TPC memory
operates in real time allowing the KSW to support any number of three party conference calls.
Fixed/dynamic pattern registers
The fixed/dynamic pattern registers can generate fixed patterns and a variety of dynamic patterns that generate
tones, data sequences, or dynamic test patterns.
Outbound selection MUX
The outbound selection multiplexer selects the correct source data to be sent to the outbound highway.
Although referred to as a multiplexer, this section does not contain a physical multiplexer. Instead,
multiplexing is implemented by connecting the outputs of all the possible data sources together and selectively
enabling one of these sources during each timeslot.
After data is sent from the outbound selection multiplexer, a parity bit is added to the data before it is placed
on the outbound TDM highway. Output from the outbound multiplexer is sent directly to the remote outbound
highway, but data for the local outbound highway is sent through a delay circuit to keep the remote and local
outbound highways in phase. This delay is 12 timeslots.
68P02902W76-B 3-53
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Highway monitor
The KSW has two highway monitor sections:

• The switchbound monitor logic which selectively monitors one of the four switchbound TDM
highways at the inputs of the TSI section.
• The outbound monitor logic which monitors the output of the outbound selection MUX.
The DSP uses these monitors for monitoring inbound and outbound data on any timeslot. When used in
conjunction with the various DSP controlled data sources and fixed/dynamic pattern selection, these monitors
allow the KSW to perform extensive self diagnostics on the TSI section.
Watchdog timer
The watchdog timer ensures that the DSP is functioning normally. The DSP writes to a memory address
that resets the watchdog timer, ensuring that it does not time out. If the DSP stops running, the watchdog
timer times out and causes the red LED on the front panel to illuminate. An interrupt is also generated and
sent to the GPROC2 via the MCAP bus. If a DSP fails, the TSI section of the KSW still switches data, but
no new path connections are implemented. This results in existing calls being held while the system is
reconfigured around the failed KSW.
Interrupt logic
The interrupt logic generates two interrupts to the DSP:

• Interrupt-A prompts the DSP to perform certain periodic tasks such as updating the watchdog
timer and the dynamic pattern registers.
• Interrupt-B, processes alarms such as clock and reference alarms, and parity alarms.
Serial interface logic
The serial interface logic supports the TTY interface. This interface is connected to a dedicated backplane
connector port. This port is a buffered RS232 type. The TTY can be used to control the KSW, monitor KSW
operation status, and support KSW diagnostics.
3-54 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
KSW switching
The usable switching capacity of each KSW depends on site hardware and software configurations because
certain modules require a number of ports for their own use. The KSW is controlled by the local GPROC2 via
the MCAP bus.
Each KSW can switch connections between 1024 inputs and 1024 outputs. However, total switching capacity
can be expanded by interconnecting up to three additional KSWs via KSWXs.
In this configuration, each KSW has the ability to switch data between 2048
(2 x 1024), 3072 (3 x 1024) or 4096 (4 x 1024) 64 kbit/s input ports and its 1024 outbound ports. Each
KSW has access to all 2, 3 or 4 switchbound highways, although each KSW only drives its own 1024
port outbound TDM highway.
KSW in a BSC2
KSW switching at the BSC2 is variable. Physical channel mapping on the A interface is performed for each
call, and at every handover.
KSW in a RXCDR2
KSW switching in an RXU3 shelf is fixed. It provides one to one physical mapping between the traffic to and
from the BSC2 and the traffic to and from the MSC.
68P02902W76-B 3-55
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
KSW block diagram
Figure 3-17 KSW block diagram
3-56 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Interconnected KSWs
Figure 3-18 KSW interconnection diagram
68P02902W76-B 3-57
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
MSI Chapter 3: Digital modules
MSI
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
The Multiple Serial Interface (MSI) module drives two separate interface lines to and from the TDM bus.
MSI module
The MSI module can drive two European 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) data lines.
One of the E1 lines is referred to as group A, the other E1 line is known as group B.
The E1 lines can come from either:
• A balanced-line interconnect module (BIM3).
• Coaxial Interface Module (CIM).
The MSI can also extract the clock synchronization from the E1 line data stream.
An RS232 maintenance port, to which a personal computer (PC) can be connected for testing and debugging,
is provided at the top of the BSU3 or RXU3 shelf.
Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1 serial data stream.
Two E1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1 line.
Requirements
The MSI module is fitted in:

• Slots L6 to L17 of the BSU3 shelf assembly.
• Slots L6 to L10 of the RXU3 shelf assembly.
An MSI or GDP must be located in at least one of the BSU3 locations below for BSC2 initialization purposes.
• Shelf 0 slot 16 (Software communicates via either group A or group B)
• Shelf 0 slot 14 (Software communicates via group A)
• Shelf 1 (if second BSU3 in BSC2) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A)
RXU3 initialization uses slot 10 instead of slot 16, and slot 8 instead of slot 14.
3-58 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 MSI
MSI module
Figure 3-19 MSI module
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
ALARM (RED) LED,

NORMALLY OFF
ACTIVE (GREEN)
LED, NORMALLY
ON
RESET/DISABLE
SWITCH
68P02902W76-B 3-59
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
General features
The MSI converts signals from the E1 lines from serial format to the parallel format that the TDM highway
requires, and converts signals transmitted to the E1 lines from parallel to serial. The MSI also provides
frame alignment.
Each serial line can carry the following to and from the active TDM highway in the BSU3:
• One 64 kbit/s channel for synchronization.
• One 64 kbit/s channel for control signalling.
• Thirty 64 kbit/s channels that can each be used as follows:

1 Traffic (four 16 kbit/s compressed voice/data channels each).
1 Additional control channels.

If all 30 channels are allocated to traffic, 120 traffic channels are possible.
These channels can be placed in any of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway under the
control of the GPROC2.
The interfaces provided by MSIs depend upon the transcoding location:

• If transcoding is integrated with the BSC2, the MSI provides the BSC2 to BTS interface.
• If transcoding is not integrated with the BSC2, the MSI provides the RXCDR2 to BSC2 and
BSC2 to BTS interfaces.
Transcoded environment
The MSI can support 240 x 16 kbit/s traffic channels in a transcoded environment, as defined by GSM. To
accomplish this, four 16 kbit/s channels are multiplexed into one 64 kbit/s timeslot, as shown in the following
example:
30 64 kbit/s timeslots of a serial data stream
x4 Submultiplexed 16 kbit/s traffic channels
x2 E1 lines
= 240 16 kbit/s traffic channels
Refer to the MSI block diagram shown in Figure 3-20.
3-60 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
MC68000 processor
A Motorola MC68000 processor, operating at 8 MHz, controls:
• The E1 line to TDM interface function.
• A multiplexer that selects the extracted clock to be routed to the GCLK.
The processor reports the following to the controlling GPROC2 on the MCAP bus:
• Extracted clock failures.
• Frame alignment errors.
• Multiframe alignment errors.
• Bipolar violations.
• CRC4 errors.
• Transmit or receive failures.
EPROM
The EPROM contains 128 kbytes of bootstrap program code. At power-up the bootstrap program sends a
request message to the GPROC2 to download the MSI operating program into the SRAM. The SRAM also
stores program variables, and can be permanently saved in EEPROM.
E1 line to TDM interface circuits

There are two identical E1 lines to TDM interface circuits on the MSI module. This functional description
applies to both.
The TDM interface section converts incoming data from E1 line serial to TDM parallel. The two E1 lines are
interleaved onto the TDM bus in groups of two and are spaced out by 32 timeslots. The sequence is as follows:
• Group A timeslot 0, group B timeslot 0.
Outgoing traffic data is converted from parallel to serial. The serial data is then sent to the E1 line transmitter
which converts it to standard E1 line levels. The E1 line data is then HDB3 and CRC4 encoded. After
encoding, the data is routed to the loopback multiplexer and to a level converter. The level converter converts
from split-phase, TTL level unipolar to bipolar.
Table 3-4 illustrates the E1 line to TDM Interface circuit actions:
68P02902W76-B 3-61
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Table 3-4 TDM interface circuit actions
Stage Action
1 The system matches impedance and isolates the signal
2 The E1 line receive signal is applied to a level converter
3 The level converter converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase
TTL level unipolar
4 The signal passes to the HDB3 decoder and clock extraction circuit
5 The signal goes through a crosspoint switch for:
• Diagnostic purposes.
• Distance measurements.
• Drop and insert feature utilization.
The impedance matching circuits consist of isolation transformers and Zener diodes, which:
• Impedance match the two sides of the interface.
• Provide secondary surge protection from high voltage transients, such as lightning strikes,
which may come down the E1 lines.
The "drop and insert" feature allows a timeslot coming in on group A, which is meant for another BTS, to be
routed back out on group B.
Clock extraction
The clock extraction section extracts the E1 clocks, to which the entire site (either BTS or BSC2) can
be synchronized. The two extracted clocks are routed to a multiplexer that selects which clock signal (if
any) is routed to the GCLK.
Frame decoding
The HDB3 and CRC4 decoding section performs frame decoding according to CCITT recommendation
G.704 for digital multiplex equipment.
3-62 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
MSI diagram
Figure 3-20 MSI block diagram
68P02902W76-B 3-63
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GDP Chapter 3: Digital modules
GDP
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
The Generic DSP Processor (GDP) module can be used as an enhanced XCDR, with additional features,
including Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) speech and uplink/downlink audio volume control. The GDP DSP
firmware is downloadable whereas the XCDR DSP firmware is mask programmed.
The description in the following pages assumes the GDP is being used as an enhanced XCDR.
The GDP module can be used only with systems running GSR3 or later releases, as this contains
the necessary software support to allow operation.
For a BSC which will operate the EFR speech option, all transcoder boards it connects to must be
GDP, not XCDR.
The GDP has two configured types, one for E1 serial line use and one for T1 serial line use. Each
GDP type has a different framer/transceiver with accompanying crystal oscillator, and two
associated resistors. This means that a GDP used for E1 serial line use cannot be used for T1,
and a GDP used for T1 serial line use cannot be used for E1.
The GDP module:
• Provides the transcoding interface to the MSC. The GDP module is located at the RXCDR, or
at a BSC where transcoding is integrated within the BSC.
• Interfaces an E1/T1 serial line to the internal cabinet TDM highway, which is in a parallel
format.
• Transcodes thirty E1(twenty-four T1) 64 kbit/s channels, inserting them as part of 120 E1 (96
T1) compressed voice/data channels, in accordance with the GSM recommendations:
1 Channel zero of each E1 line is reserved for synchronization.
1 Channel sixteen of each E1 line is reserved for link control signalling.
1 The 30 remaining E1 channels are transcoded.
Each GDP supports thirty compressed voice and data channels, using 15 DSPs. These
channels, and the synchronization and link control signalling channels, can be placed in any of
the 1024 channels on the TDM highway under control of the GPROC/GPROC2.
3-64 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 GDP
Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1/T1 serial data stream.
Two E1/T1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1/T1 line.
Requirements
The GDP module is fitted in:

• Slots L6 to L17 (but maximum 6 modules in total) in the BSU3 shelf assembly.
• Slots L6 to L24 (maximum 19 modules) in the RXU shelf assembly.
An MSI, MSI2, XCDR or GDP must be located in at least one of the BSU3 locations below for BSC
initialization purposes.
• Shelf 0 slot 16 (Software communicates via either group A or group B)
• Shelf 0 slot 14 (Software communicates via group A)
• Shelf 1 (if second BSU3 in BSC) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A)
An RXU initialization uses slot 10 instead of slot 16, and slot 8 instead of slot 14.
68P02902W76-B 3-65
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GDP module
Figure 3-21 GDP module
BACKPLANE
ALARM LED CONNECTOR
(RED)
ACTIVE LED
(GREEN)
DOWN = DISABLE
Brief description
Refer to the GDP block diagram at the end of this section.

The GDP module contains a digital signal processor (DSP) unit that performs:
• GSM-defined speech encoding.
• GSM-defined speech decoding.
• Submultiplexing functions.
3-66 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
The speech transcoder bi-directionally interfaces the 64 kbit/s E1/T1 line in the land network to the 13 kbit/s
vocoder format used on the air interface.
Signalling channels are passed straight through the transcoder.
Architecture
The GDP module contains the following major systems:

• MCU subsystem.
• DSP subsystem.
• E1/T1 Line interface.
• Digital crosspoint switch.
• MCAP interface.
• TDM interface.
MCU subsystem
The main component of the processor system is the microcontroller unit (MCU), which:
• Controls and interfaces the other major systems on the GDP module.
• Performs self-diagnostics and error monitoring.
Other components of the processor system are:

• A watchdog timer.
• 256 kbytes of RAM.
• 512 kbytes of Flash EPROM.
• 1 kbyte of dual port RAM for MCAP messaging.
• 1 kbyte of dual port RAM for TDM interface.
• A power monitor circuit.
The watchdog timer is periodically strobed by the MCU; an alarm is generated if it is not strobed before a
pre-set timeout.
68P02902W76-B 3-67
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
DSP subsystem
The DSP subsystem consists of 15 identical blocks each with:

• One 80 MHz DSP processor
• 128k x 24 dedicated SRAM for program and data storage.
• Two Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interfaces (ESSIs).
• On-board phase-locked loops to multiply input from subsystem 16.384 MHz clock.
DSP firmware is downloadable. The MCU uses one of its Serial Communications Controllers (SCC1) to
connect to the SCI of all DSPs, for control, monitoring and download purposes. All the ESSI signals to the
DSPs are buffered by tristate devices.
Subrate multiplexer modes
There is a subrate multiplexer within the serial data formatter, converting data from the DSP subsystem ESSI
format to the digital crosspoint switch ST bus format.
The subrate multiplexer can operate in three modes.
Table 3-5 lists the subrate multiplexer modes and shows what happens:
Table 3-5 Multiplexer modes
Valid Input
Parameter
Default
DSP loop back The DSP output is logically connected to its input, enabling a self
test function.
16 kbytes multiplexed Each DSP receives 16 bits of data:The first 8 bits are from a 16
kbytes/s subrate channel from the TDM highway Two bits at a time are
expanded into PCM.
The last eight bits are from the E1/T1 line data stream. The PCM is
processed into 16 kbit/s TRAU frames.
64 kbytes non-multiplexed Each DSP receives 16 bits of data:The first eight bits are from the
TDM bus, and are passed to the E1/T1 line.
The second eight bits are from the E1/T1 line, and are passed to the
TDM bus.
3-68 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
E1/T1 Line interface
The line interface system performs:

• Impedance matching.
• Secondary surge protection from high voltage transients (such as lightning strikes), which
may come down the E1/T1 lines.
The impedance matching circuit consists of isolation transformers and Zener diodes.
After impedance matching and isolation the E1/T1 line receive signal is applied to a level converter that
converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level unipolar.
After level conversion the received E1/T1 line data is sent to the clock extraction circuit and a decoder. The
clock extraction section extracts the E1/T1 clock to which all BSU3/RXU shelves can be synchronized.
The decoding section performs frame decoding law CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex
equipment. Traffic is then routed to the switching system.
CRC-4 Error checking
A GDP module configured for use with an E1 serial line supports CRC-4 error checking. This is set by default
to the on state 0. All associated switches (MSCs) must also have CRC-4 error checking set to the on state, so
allowing communication across the A-interface
To check if the GDP board CRC-4 state is set, use the MMS_config_type CM database command.
disp_element MMS_config_type <location>
Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference (68P02901W23) for information on the above
CM database command.
To ensure the correct setting of CRC-4 error checking at the MSC, consult the vendor supplied equipment
manual.
Digital crosspoint switch
The switching system consist of a digital switch, which performs the following functions:.
• Transmission of E1/T1 line data stream and TDM data streams.
• Connection between the processor section and the E1/T1 line interface system.
68P02902W76-B 3-69
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
MCAP interface
The MCAP interface system supports two redundant MCAP buses to the GDP. The GDP communicates with
the GPROC2 in the same manner as all other full-size modules.
TDM interface
The TDM interface system takes traffic data from the TDM bus and converts it from parallel data to serial
data. The serial data is then sent to the switching system.
3-70 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
GDP diagram
Figure 3-22 GDP module block diagram
68P02902W76-B 3-71
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
NVM board description Chapter 3: Digital modules
NVM board description

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose of the NVM board
The NVM (Non Volatile Memory) board provides the BSC2 or RXCDR2 with an improved recovery facility
following a total power loss.
Without the NVM board, a total power loss causes configuration data held at the site to be lost. This data is
normally recovered by downloading from the OMC-R once power is restored.
If an NVM board is installed, data is retrieved from the NVM board rather than from the OMC-R during
recovery from a total power loss.
Mechanical design
The NVM board is a full height digital board, designed for installation in the BSU3 cage 0 of a BSC2,
or the RXU3 cage 0 of the RXCDR2.
The PCMCIA cards used with the NVM board are NOT the same type as used in M-Cell
equipment.
The PCMCIA card swap switch is currently not supported in software.
3-72 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 NVM board description
NVM board
Figure 3-23 The NVM board
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
NVM BOARD
STATUS LEDS
NVM BOARD
RESET/DISABLE
SWITCH
PCMCIA CARD
STATUS LEDS
EJECT BUTTON
PCMCIA CARD
SLOTS
PCMCIA CARD SWAP

SWITCH
68P02902W76-B 3-73
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
NVM board description Chapter 3: Digital modules
Software ascertains if the NVM board is present during RAM initialization of a BSC2 or RXCDR2 site. If
the board is present, software begins loading objects to the NVM board. If the board is not present then the
software continues to check for its existence. A low priority software task is responsible for loading the NVM
board with a copy of the BSS software objects that currently reside on the master GPROC2. The transfer is
achieved via the MCAP bus.
Two synchronized copies of the database are stored. This ensures that if a power outage occurs during loading
to the NVM board, then a usable copy of the database is still available. Only one copy is updated at a time,
and is marked as the current version when the update is complete.
The object list and the database on the NVM board and the master GPROC2 are audited at regular intervals. If
any differences between these objects on the NVM board and the master GPROC2 are detected, the NVM
board is updated automatically from the master GPROC2.
During ROM initialization, the NVM board is used as a BSS software source only if all GPROC2s at the
site have no BSS software (for example, after restoration of power following a power failure). If the NVM
board is not present, or fails during BSS software crossload to the master GPROC2, ROM initialization
continues as normal.
The NVM board can only be used with systems running GSR5 or later releases. These releases
contain the necessary software support.
Interrogating the NVM board
Object header information of the objects stored on the NVM board can be viewed using the nvm objects
EMON command from an LMT at the master GPROC2.
Table 3-6 shows the possible output string results of using the above EMON command, depending on the
configuration of the BSU3 or RXU3 cage.
3-74 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 NVM board description
Table 3-6 EMON command results, depending on configuration
Configuration Output String

PCMCIA card BSS code objects
NVM present?
present? present?
No - - NVM Board not
present or not
available
Yes No - PCMCIA Card not
present or not
available
Yes Yes No No load
information
available
Yes Yes Yes Object headers of objects
present on the PCMCIA
card are displayed.
68P02902W76-B 3-75
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Half-size modules Chapter 3: Digital modules
Half-size modules
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
Half size digital modules provide interface extension for the full size modules, enabling unit interconnection
(for example BSU3 to BSU3, RXU3 to RXU3) and external alarm connection.
The modules fit into slots in the upper card cage of a BSU3 or RXU3 shelf. The slots are numbered, right to
left, from U0 to U28.
The following sections describe the half size modules that can be mounted in a BSU3 or RXU3.
The number of half size modules fitted depends upon the specific configuration of the BSU3 or RXU3.
The modules
The following half size modules are mounted in a BSU3 or RXU3 shelf:
Do not fit a digital module in any equipment for which it is not suitable.
• Clock extender (CLKX).
• Kiloport switch extender (KSWX).
• Local area network extender (LANX).
• Parallel interface extender (PIX).
3-76 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 CLKX
CLKX
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
Laser radiation could be emitted when fibre optic cables are disconnected. Do not
look directly into beams, with or without the use of any optical aids. Radiation can
come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables
connected to data in/out connectors.
The clock extender (CLKX) module optically distributes the clock and reference signals generated by the
GCLK in the parent shelf to all other shelves at a site.
The extended clock signals are received by a KSWXL in the remote BSU/RXU3.
Requirements
The CLKX module is fitted in slots U2 to U7 of the BSU or RXU3 shelf assembly.
A maximum of six remote/extended shelves can be supported.
In a multishelf site, the shelf containing the GCLK must also receive its clocks via a CLKX and a KSWXL
to maintain synchronization integrity.
Fibre optic cables extending clock reference signals, from the parent shelf to all other shelves at a site, must be
of the same length to maintain site synchronization integrity.
68P02902W76-B 3-77
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
CLKX Chapter 3: Digital modules
CLKX module illustration
Figure 3-24 CLKX module
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
SIX FIBRE OPTIC

CLOCK OUTPUTS TO
LOCAL KSWXS
3-78 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 CLKX
CLKX block diagram
Figure 3-25 CLKX block diagram
68P02902W76-B 3-79
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
DSWX Chapter 3: Digital modules
DSWX
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
The DSWX uses an LED as the fibre optic light source, not a laser. The DSWX fibre
optics are therefore not hazardous. Since other modules in the cabinet may emit
hazardous laser radiation when fibre optic cables are disconnected, to eliminate
the possibility of mistakes do not look directly into any beams with or without the
use of optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or
unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
The double kiloport switch extender (DSWX) module extends the 1024/2048 ports of a KSW/DSW2
respectively, in one BSU or RXU type cage to the TDM highways in another BSU or RXU type cage. It is
used when the number of required peripherals exceeds the capacity of a BSU or RXU shelf.
• A DSWX in expansion mode (DSWXE) connects the KSW/DSW2 to the KSW/DSW2 in a
another BSU or RXU type cage.
• A DSWX in remote transmit mode (DSWXR) accepts the highway data from a KSW/DSW2
and sends it to a local receiver.
• A DSWX in local receive mode (DSWXL) accepts the highway data and drives the TDM bus in
the local BSU or RXU, and also provides a clock reference in multishelf configurations.
Although a KSW/DSW2 is located in a particular BSU/RXU, it is logically connected to the TDM bus in that
BSU/RXU and to the TDM buses in up to 13 other shelves, which it can be driving. For each BSU or RXU
that a KSW/DSW2 is driving, two KSWXs/DSWXs are required; one acting as a remote transmitter attached
to the KSW/DSW2, the other as a local receiver attached to the TDM highway in the remote shelf.
3-80 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 DSWX
Requirements
The DSWX is fitted in slots U0 to U9 and slots U21 to U28 of the BSU or RXU type shelf assembly,
with the following limitations:
• DSWXR must be fitted in slots U2 to U6 and U24 to U28.
• DSWXL must be fitted in slots U0 and U1.
• DSWXE must be fitted in slots U7 to U9 and U21 to U23.
The fibre optic cables used to extend/expand the TDM highway from one BSU/RXU to another BSU/RXU
must be of the same length. This allows correct operation of the TDM highway to be maintained.
DSWX module
Figure 3-26 DSWX module
Fibre optic input

from another
DSWX/KSWX
Fibre optic Active alarm,

input from Green LED
clock
RESET/DISABLE
switch
Fibre optic
output to another
DSWX/KSWX
68P02902W76-B 3-81
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
DSWX Chapter 3: Digital modules
Brief description
The DSWX is a multi-function module responsible for optically transmitting and receiving all TDM bus
information between shelves, and for distributing the TDM bus information and TDM clock and reference
pulses in the BSS shelves.
The DSWX is required for all installations if it is used for clock distribution. In a BSSC3 installation using
more than one cabinet, it also extends the 1024 ports of a KSW/DSW2 to other shelves and/or interconnects
up to four KSW/DSW2 modules via fibre optic cable. In a TDM switch highway extended between two
module shelves, a KSWX/DSWX module is required in each shelf.
There are three modes in which the DSWX may operate. These modes are dependent on where in the shelf the
DSWX module is placed. The three modes are:
Expansion (DSWXE)
In a BSSC3 installation, expands the standard or double rate TDM bus between up to four KSW/DSW2
respectively to expand switching capacity. DSWXE modules are optically connected to other DSWXE modules.
Remote (DSWXR)
In a BSSC3 installation, extends the standard or double rate TDM bus to a shelf with no KSW/DSW2. This
allows a KSW/DSW2 to switch data to and from highway interface modules (MSIs) in a shelf with no
KSW/DSW2. DSWXR modules are optically connected to DSWXL modules.
Local (DSWXL)
The DSWXL distributes the TDM bus within a shelf and this is received optically from a DSWXR/KSWXR
in another shelf, and distributes clock and reference signals received from a CLKX. DSWXL modules are
optically connected to CLKX modules and can also be connected to DSWXR/KSWXR modules.
3-82 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 DSWX
Block diagram of DSWX
Figure 3-27 Block diagram of DSWX
Status0 CLK16A
backplane REF125A
buffer
TDM Clock 16
Clock/Reference
TDM Clock Select Select
TDM Ref 125

Clock Multiply CLK16B
TDM Clock 32
Clock Fail backplane
TDM Clock 64
buffer REF125B
9 TDM_I
TDM TX 9
data Optical 10 backplane
Parallel Encode interface
I/F. to Serial 9B/10B
To another CLK
DSWX or
KSWX Frame Status0
KSW pres
Counter/ RMTENA
Sync TDM MODE1-0
Reset Control 2
TDM RX OE
Data Optical Logic
Read Addr
Status0 9 Diag Data Lpbk
Write
Addr
Read
I/F. From Serial to 10 Decode 9
another Parallel 10B/9B
DSWX or Elastic 9
KSWX 9 backplane
Recovered Clock
Buffer interface TDM_O
TDM Data Path TDM VLTN
Reset
Data Out
Reset
Diag
Status1
Toggle 9
9
Switch Diagnostic Diag Data In

LED DIAG Status
green
Control Test/Control Diag Control
MODE1
Logic Logic JTAG port
red Reset Front Panel Interface 4
LEDs and Diagnostics
FLT (board)
MRQ (board)
FLT (mate)
from MATE
Clock/Data Status Clock MRQ (mate)

Status0
Control 16 MHz clock (mate)
Clock Recovery and Logic/ Encoded reference (mate)
Clock Fail
Distribution System Clock
CLK16Ux
System
MODE1 Clock/ REFxxxU
Reference Reference
Encoded Clock REF125* Distribution CLK16Lx
REF60* backplane REFxxxL
Reference buffer
Clock Clock/Encoded Decode REF612*
xclk pres
Optical Reference
Interface Recovery 16 MHz clock (board)
to MATE
Encoded reference (board)
Status0
Status1 7 Serial SER-A
Serial Bus Control0
Control1
7
7 Bus SER-B
Interface 7 Controller 7 SLOTID
RevLevel SELECT A/B
Board ID 3
4 Reset
68P02902W76-B 3-83
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
KSWX Chapter 3: Digital modules
KSWX
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
Possible laser radiation when fibre optic cables are disconnected. Do not look
directly into beams with or without the use of any optical aids. Radiation can
come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables
connected to data in/out connectors.
The kiloport switch extender (KSWX) module extends the 1024 ports of a KSW in one BSU3 or RXU3 to
the TDM highways in another BSU3 or RXU3. It is used when the number of required peripherals exceeds
the capacity of a BSU3 or RXU3 shelf.
• A KSWX in expansion mode (KSWXE) connects the KSW to the KSW in a remote BSU3 or
RXU3.
• A KSWX in remote transmit mode (KSWXR) accepts the highway data from a KSW and
sends it to a local receiver.
• A KSWX in local receive mode (KSWXL) accepts the highway data and drives the TDM bus in
the local BSU3 or RXU3, and also provides a clock reference in multishelf configurations.
Although a KSW is located in a particular BSU3/RXU3, it is logically connected to the TDM bus in that
BSU3/RXU and to the TDM buses in up to 13 other shelves, which it can be driving. For each BSU3 or
RXU3 that a KSW is driving, two KSWXs are required; one acting as a remote transmitter attached to the
KSW, the other as a local receiver attached to the TDM highway in the remote shelf.
Requirements
The KSWX is fitted in slots U0 to U9 and slots U21 to U28 of the BSU3 or RXU3 shelf assembly, with the
following limitations:
• KSWXR must be fitted in slots U2 to U6 and U24 to U28.
• KSWXL must be fitted in slots U0 and U1.
• KSWXE must be fitted in slots U7 to U9 and U21 to U23.
The fibre optic cables used to extend/expand the TDM highway from one BSU3/RXU3 to another
BSU3/RXU3 must be of the same length. This allows correct operation of the TDM highway to be maintained.
3-84 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 KSWX
KSWX module
Figure 3-28 KSWX module
Fibre optic input

from another
KSWX
Fibre optic RESET/DISABLE

input from switch
clock

output to another Green LED
KSWX
68P02902W76-B 3-85
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
KSWX Chapter 3: Digital modules
Brief description
The KSWX is a multi-function module responsible for optically transmitting all TDM bus information
between shelves, and for distributing the TDM bus information and TDM clock and reference pulses in
the BSS shelves.
The KSWX is required when a site has more than one cabinet. It extends the 1024 ports of a KSW to other
shelves and/or interconnects up to four KSW modules via fibre optic cable. In a TDM switch highway
extended between two module shelves, a KSWX module is required in each shelf.
There are three modes in which the KSWX may operate. These modes are dependent on where in the shelf the
KSWX module is placed. The three modes are:
Expansion (KSWXE)
Expands the TDM bus between up to four KSW to expand switching capacity. KSWXE modules are optically
connected to other KSWXE modules.
Remote (KSWXR)
Extends the TDM bus to a shelf with no KSW/TSW. This allows a KSW to switch data to and from highway
interface modules (MSIs) in a shelf with no KSW. KSWXR modules are optically connected to KSWXL
modules.
Local (KSWXL)
The KSWXL distributes the TDM bus within a shelf and this is received optically from a KSWXR in another
shelf, and distributes clock and reference signals received from a CLKX. KSWXL modules are optically
connected to CLKX modules and can also be connected to KSWXR modules.
3-86 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 KSWX
KSWX diagram
Figure 3-29 KSWX block diagram
68P02902W76-B 3-87
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
LANX Chapter 3: Digital modules
LANX
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
Possible laser radiation when fibre optic cables are disconnected. Do not look
directly into beams with or without the use of any optical aids. Radiation can
come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated cables connected to
data in/out connectors.
Two local area network extender (LANX) modules are required for each BSU3 or RXU3 shelf, one for
MCAP bus A and one for MCAP bus B. The LANX:
• Connects one of the LAN interfaces of each GPROC2 in a BSU3 or RXU3 shelf to the local
shelf token ring LAN via the shelf backplane.
• Allows optical LAN extension from one BSU3 or RXU3 to another.
• Switches empty module slots or faulty GPROC2s out of the LAN.
• Sets the cage (BSU3 or RXU3 shelf) ID.
• Performs on-board MCAP bus arbitration.
• Provides shelf active/standby redundant LAN control.
Shelf to shelf extension is via a LANX module in each shelf, interconnected with fibre optic cabling.
The LANX supports up to eight GPROC2s on the local LAN in one BSU3 or RXU3 shelf.
Requirements
LANX modules must be fitted in slots U19 and U20 of the BSU3 or RXU3 shelf assembly at all times.
A sixteen position (0 to F hex) rotary switch on the LANX module sets the BSU3 or RXU3 LAN address
(shelf ID number).
3-88 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 LANX
LANX module illustration
Figure 3-30 LANX module
Backplane
connector
Fibre optic input from

another LANX in
another shelf at the
site
Fibre optic output to
another LANX in
site Rotary switch for
setting shelf to
number
68P02902W76-B 3-89
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
LANX description
Refer to the block diagram at the end of this section.

Each LANX receives LAN data from another shelf via optical fibre cables and:
1. Routes the LAN data to the first GPROC2.
2. Receives the LAN data back from the first GPROC2.
3. Routes the LAN data to the second GPROC2.
4. Receives the LAN data back from the second GPROC2.
And so on until all GPROC2s in the shelf have received the LAN data.
The LAN data received back from the last GPROC2 in the shelf is sent via fibre optics to the next shelf (if
LAN extension is used). If a GPROC2 is not present in the shelf or has failed, the LANX bypasses it and
passes the LAN data to the next GPROC2.
Local LAN data switching
Each GPROC2 using the LANX uses the following signals to route LAN data:
• LAN DATA IN.
• LAN DATA OUT.
• INSERT.
GPROC2 present
When the GPROC2 is present and operating with no faults, the INSERT line is logic 1, causing LANX
multiplexers to switch the GPROC2 signals as follows:
• LAN DATA OUT signal of this GPROC2 is switched to the LAN DATA IN signal of the next
GPROC2 slot. In the case of shelf extension, the LAN DATA OUT signal of GPROC2 7 is
switched to the fibre optic transmitter stage.
• LAN DATA OUT signal from the previous GPROC2 slot is switched to the LAN DATA IN
signal of this GPROC2. In the case of shelf extension, the signal from the fibre optic receiver
stage is switched to the LAN DATA IN signal of GPROC2 0.
3-90 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
GPROC2 not present

If the GPROC2 is not present or operating with faults, the INSERT line is logic 0 causing LANX multiplexers
to switch the GPROC2 signals as follows:
• LAN DATA OUT signal of this GPROC2 is switched (looped back) to the LAN DATA
IN signal of the same GPROC2.
• LAN DATA OUT signal of the previous GPROC2 is switched to the LAN DATA IN signal of
the next GPROC2.
This removes the GPROC2 from the LAN ring, and subsequent LAN data by-passes the GPROC2.
Extended LAN data switching
In configurations of more than one shelf, the LANX allows the local LAN data to be extended to another shelf
via optical fibre connected to a LANX in the other shelf.
Any of the GPROC2s in the shelf controls local LAN data switching between shelves. Control is via the
serial bus connected to the LANX signal, LAN LOCAL/EXTERNAL.
Logic 1
A logic 1 on the LAN LOCAL/EXTERNAL line causes multiplexers on the LANX to switch signals
as follows:
• LAN DATA IN signal of GPROC2 7 is switched to the fibre optic transmitter stage. The optical
transmitter provides a Tx data signal, consisting of the local LAN data of this shelf, which
is transmitted via fibre optic to a LANX in another shelf.
• Rx data signal from the fibre optic receiver stage is switched to the LAN DATA OUT signal of
GPROC2 0.
Logic 0
A logic 0 on the LAN LOCAL/EXTERNAL line causes multiplexers on the LANX to switch signals from
LAN DATA IN signal of GPROC2 7 is switched to the LAN DATA OUT signal of GPROC2 0.
This by-passes the LANX fibre optic transmitter and receiver stages consequently disabling local LAN
extension to another shelf.
Power loss
If the local LANX loses dc power, the Rx data signal from the fibre optic receiver stage is switched (looped
back) to the optical transmitter, providing a Tx data signal via fibre optic to the LANX in another shelf.
68P02902W76-B 3-91
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Bus arbiter
The LANX bus arbiter decides which GPROC2 is allowed to write data to the MCAP bus via the LAN
DATA IN line. Each GPROC2, 0 to 7, can assert its respective BUS REQUEST line. The bus arbiter
starts by monitoring GPROC2 0 slot.
If GPROC2 0 has an active BUS REQUEST line, the bus arbiter asserts the GPROC2 0 BUS GRANT line.
GPROC2 0 seizes the MCAP bus and writes data to the bus. When GPROC2 0 has finished writing data to the
MCAP bus, it deactivates the BUS REQUEST line. This frees the bus and the bus arbiter activates the BUS
GRANT line of the next higher numbered GPROC2 with an active BUS REQUEST line.
Redundant LAN
If the redundant GPROC2 LAN interface is used, a redundant LANX is required. Each LANX has two
serial bus interfaces for communications with the GPROC2. The selection of which LAN interface is to be
used is determined by the GPROC2.
Shelf ID
The shelf ID is a unique hexadecimal number assigned to each BSU3 or RXU3 shelf. The LANX is fitted with
a 16-position (hexadecimal encoded) rotary switch, which defines the shelf ID number of the shelf containing
the LANX. The shelf ID is read by the GPROC2 via the serial bus interface. The ID number is used by the
BSS software when configuring the BSU3 or RXU3.
No two shelves at a site can have the same shelf ID. When a redundant LANX is present in a shelf, it must
have the same ID number as the primary LANX.
The following rules apply:
• A BSU3 shelf in a BSC2 is numbered 0 to D (hexadecimal).
• A RXU3 shelf in a BSC2 is numbered 0 or 1 (hexadecimal).
Front panel
The front panel of the LANX incorporates:

• Rx fibre optic input connector. This connects to the Tx fibre optic output of a LANX
in another shelf.
• Tx fibre optic output connector. This connects to the Rx fibre optic input of a LANX
in another shelf.
• Rotary switch for setting the BSU3/RXU3 shelf ID number.
3-92 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
LANX block diagram
Figure 3-31 LANX block diagram
68P02902W76-B 3-93
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
PIX Chapter 3: Digital modules
PIX
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
Refer to the block diagram on the next page.

The parallel interface extender (PIX) module provides:
• An input/output (I/O) interface for customer site equipment.
• The interface logic between the GPROC2 and external customer alarm devices such as
relays and switches.
• Eight optically isolated inputs and four relay outputs.
Requirements
PIX modules can be fitted in the following slots U16, 17 and U18 of a BSU3 or RXU3 shelf assembly,
in a BSSC3 cabinet.
3-94 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 PIX
PIX module illustration
Figure 3-32 PIX module
Backplane connector
Green Alarm LED

ON = no alarms
OFF = customer alarm
detected
Connector is cabled
to top of cabinet for
interconnect to
customer
equipment
68P02902W76-B 3-95
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
PIX Chapter 3: Digital modules
PIX block diagram
Figure 3-33 PIX block diagram
3-96 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Chapter
4
Introduction to maintenance
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
68P02902W76-B 4-1
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Introduction Chapter 4: Introduction to maintenance
Introduction
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This chapter:
• Explains the purpose of the maintenance section.
• Lists prerequisites for using the maintenance section.
• Lists documents related to this section.
It also contains general maintenance information, including information on:

• Resetting and reinitializing a site.
• Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) to a cabinet.
• Locating and identifying faulty cabinets and devices.
Audience
This maintenance section is for technical staff who work at Base Station System (BSS) sites.
The content assumes a degree of familiarity with Motorola BSS hardware and software. Technical staff may
use this manual to diagnose and repair the BSSC3 cabinets.
Purpose
Use the procedures contained within this section to remove and replace various components in the cabinet.
Prerequisites
This section assumes the reader knows:

• How to operate a local maintenance terminal (LMT).
• How the BSS functions.
4-2 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Introduction
Structure
This section contains the following chapters:

• Maintenance procedures
This chapter contains information on the maintenance procedures to be carried out on the
BSC2/RXCDR2 cabinets.
• Replacement procedures
This chapter contains detailed replacement procedures for components within the
BSC2/RXCDR2 cabinet.
• Miscellaneous repair
This chapter contains replacement/repair procedures for cabinet components not included in
the Replacement procedures chapter.
• Parts information
This chapter provides information required to order replacement parts for the BSC2/RXCDR2.
Related documentation
There are two types of reference documentation, required reference and general reference.
• Required reference documentation consists of books which supplement the information
contained within this manual. The required reference documentation for this manual is the
Technical Description: BSS Command Reference (68P02901W23).
• General reference documentation contains background information to this manual. General

reference documents to this manual are Maintenance Information: GSM Alarm Handling at
the OMC-R (68P02901W26); Maintenance Information: GSM BSS Field Troubleshooting
(68P02901W51); and Operating Information: GSM System Operation (68P02901W14).
Access control
Unauthorized access to BSC2/RXCDR2 hardware and associated cabinets must be prevented. The
BSC2/RXCDR2 hardware is normally installed in a location where access can be restricted to suitably
qualified personnel.
68P02902W76-B 4-3
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
General procedures Chapter 4: Introduction to maintenance
General procedures
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction to general procedures
This chapter contains general repair information. This information applies to all maintenance and repair
procedures.
Motorola recommends reading this chapter before:
• Leaving for a site.
• Beginning a repair procedure.
Table 4-1 lists the different sections in this chapter.
Table 4-1 General procedures sections
Section entitled Information contained

Test and Repair equipment lists
• A list of required testing equipment.
• A list of required repair equipment.

General repair procedures Site configuration overview information.
Man Machine Interface Information on the uses of MMI.
Locating faulty cabinets Instructions for isolating a fault to a cabinet
Connecting the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) Instructions for:
• Connecting the LMT.
• Setting up the MMI interface.
• Changing the security level.

Identifying the faulty devices The procedure for displaying alarms at the LMT.
Resetting and re-initializing a site The procedure for resetting and re-initializing a site
for power distribution unit module replacement.
4-4 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Test and repair equipment lists
Test and repair equipment lists

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Test equipment list
Table 4-2 lists the test equipment Motorola recommends for diagnosing and testing BSSC3 cabinets.
Table 4-2 GSM test equipment
Quantity Description
1 IBM compatible personal computer (PC) with PCMCIA type 2 slot
and serial comms port.
1 PC Plus or similar, terminal emulator software.
1 RS-232 cable. 9-way female to 25-way male.
1 ESD protection kit.
68P02902W76-B 4-5
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Test and repair equipment lists Chapter 4: Introduction to maintenance
Repair equipment list
Table 4-3 lists the tools Motorola recommends for repairing cabinets.
Table 4-3 Repair equipment
Quantity Description
1 Torque wrench, calibrated in newton meters or
foot-pounds.
1 Torx driver, size T-30.
1 Nut driver, size 3/8 inch.
1 Nut driver, size 5/16 inch.
1 Flat blade screwdriver.
1 Phillips screwdriver.
1 Motorola approved wrist strap.
1 Anti-static pad.
Variable Anti-static containers or bags.
1 Set, jewellers screwdrivers, both Phillips and flat
blade.
1 Bucket.
Mild dishwashing soap or detergent.
4-6 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 General repair procedures
General repair procedures

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
The Operations and Maintenance Centre Radio (OMC-R) uses Base Station System (BSS) fault management
software to determine whether or not a site is in a fault condition. If it is, the OMC-R sends a technician
to the site to fix the problem.
This section contains general steps necessary to isolate the fault.
Site definition
A site may include either or both of the following:

• Base station controller (BSC2).
• Remote transcoder (RXCDR2).
This manual assumes familiarity with these components. Refer to the appropriate section for detailed
descriptions.
68P02902W76-B 4-7
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Man machine interface (MMI) Chapter 4: Introduction to maintenance
Man machine interface (MMI)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Definition
The MMI is the interface between the user and the software.
The MMI may run on:
• A terminal at the OMC-R.
• A Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT).
MMI uses
Use the MMI to :

• Obtain information from the system:
1 Display alarm reports.
1 Retrieve device status.
• Control the system:

1 Take modules out of service (OOS).
1 Put modules into service (INS).
4-8 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Locating faulty cabinets
Locating faulty cabinets

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
This section contains instructions for localising a fault to a particular cabinet.
Prerequisites
These steps assume that:

• The OMC-R has requested a visit to the site.
• The OMC-R knows the site locations, and which cabinet is generating the alarm.
Procedure
Follow these steps to isolate the fault to a cabinet.

1. Enter the site if it is safe to do so.
2. Open the door of the faulty cabinet.

The OMC-R should be able to identify the faulty cabinet, getting the information from
various alarm messages sent by the system.
If the OMC-R has not identified the faulty cabinet, open each cabinet at the site until one with a
fault indication is found. Such an indication would be a lit Alarm (red) LED.
3. Note the status of the LED indicators on the front panel of each module equipped with them.
Figure 4-1 shows the layout of the BSU3 and RXU3 shelves in a cabinet.
4. Continue with "Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)" on page 4-11

Read KSW as DSW2.
Read KSWX as DSWX.
Read GDP as GDP2.
68P02902W76-B 4-9
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
4-10
Locating faulty cabinets
BTC 0 RMT KSWX A4 BTC 0 RMT KSWX A4

KSW A RMT KSWX A3 KSW A RMT KSWX A3
Figure 4-1
AI 2
AI 1
AI 0
GPROC2 1 RMT KSWX A2 SPARE RMT KSWX A2
GPROC2 0 RMT KSWX A1 GPROC2 7 RMT KSWX A1
GDP/MSI 0 RMT KSWX A0 GPROC2 6 RMT KSWX A0
GDP/MSI 1 EXP KSWX A2 GPROC2 5 EXP KSWX A2
KS 0
GDP/MSI 2 EXP KSWX A1 GPROC2 4 EXP KSWX A1
GMR-02
GDP/MSI 3 GPROC2 3 EXP KSWX A0
MS 0
EXP KSWX A0
GDP/MSI 4 LANX A GPROC2 2 LANX A
GDP/MSI 5 LANX B GPROC2 1 LANX B
BSU3 SHELF
RXU3 SHELF
GDP/MSI 6 SPARE GPROC2 0 SPARE
MS 4
GDP/MSI 7 SPARE GDP/MSI 0 SPARE
GDP/MSI 8 PIX 0 GDP/MSI 1 PIX 0
GDP/MSI 9 PIX 0 GDP/MSI 2 PIX 0
BSU3 and RXU3 shelf layout
GDP/MSI 10
MS 1
GDP/MSI 3
GDP/MSI 11 GDP/MSI 4
MS 5
GDP/MSI 15 EXP KSWX B0 GDP/MSI 8 EXP KSWX B0
GDP/MSI 16 EXP KSWX B1 GDP/MSI 9 EXP KSWX B1
MS 2
GDP/MSI 17 CLKX A0 EXP KSWX B2 GDP/MSI 10 CLKXA0 EXP KSWX B1
GDP/MSI 18 CLKX A1 RMT KSWX B0 GDP/MSI 11 CLKXA1 EXP KSWX B0

CLKX A2 RMT KSWX B1 CLKXA2 EXP KSWX B1
MS 6
GCLK A GCLK A
CLKX B0 RMT KSWX B2 CLKXB0 EXP KSWX B2
CLKX B1 RMT KSWX B3 CLKXB1 EXP KSWX B3
GCLK B CLKX B2 RMT KSWX B4
GCLK B CLKXB2 EXP KSWX B4
MS 3
KSW B LCL KSWX A KSW B LCL KSWX A

BTC 0 LCL KSWX B BTC 1 LCL KSWX B
KS 1
Chapter 4: Introduction to maintenance
28 Jul 2004
68P02902W76-B
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)
Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
Most of the diagnostic and repair procedures suggest connecting a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) in
order to enter MMI commands, lock and unlock devices, and view alarms.
This section gives detailed instructions for connecting the LMT.
Required tools and equipment
This procedure requires the following equipment:

• IBM compatible Personal Computer (PC) equipped with PC Plus or equivalent terminal
emulator software.
• RS-232 cable.
Refer to and Table 4-2 for a list of test equipment specifications, and to Table 4-3 for a list of repair equipment
specifications .
Prerequisites
Before performing the steps in this procedure, determine which cabinet contains the master processor.
68P02902W76-B 4-11
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) Chapter 4: Introduction to maintenance
Connecting the LMT to a GPROC2
The following procedure details the steps required to connect a PC to a GPROC2, creating a LMT.
1. Open the cabinet containing the master GPROC2.
2. Locate the master GPROC2.

Motorola recommends connecting a PC to the master GPROC2. However, a PC can be
connected to any GPROC2 that is not in an alarm state.
3. Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the asynchronous communications controller port of
the PC, and the other end to the TTY port connector on the front panel of the master GPROC2.
4. Power up the PC.

The PC is now a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT).
5. Continue with Setting up the MMI.
4-12 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)
Setting up the MMI
Follow these steps to set up the Local Maintenance Terminal.

1. Set the LMT TTY port parameters to:
1 9600 baud.
1 8 data bits.
1 1 stop bit.
1 1 start bit.
1 no parity.
2. Press the RETURN (or ENTER) key.

The LMT displays one of the following prompts:
1
MMI-ROM 0115 ->
(for GPROC2 running in ROM).
1
MMI-RAM 0115 ->
(for GPROC2 running in RAM).
Work from either prompt.
Connection to the master GPROC2 will result in the number 0115 being
displayed as above. Connection to a GPROC2 other than the master, will
result in a different number being displayed.
Changing the security level
Follow these steps to change the security level.
68P02902W76-B 4-13
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) Chapter 4: Introduction to maintenance
1. Enter the disp_level command at the prompt.

The system displays the current user security level, like this:
Current security level is 1
2. Enter the chg_level command at the prompt.

The system asks for the password to gain access to the next level. There are two passwords
available:
1 One password changes the security level to Level 2.
1 The second password changes the security level to Level 3.
Passwords must be entered in sequence. The system does not permit a jump
from security Level 1 to security Level 3. Security Level 2 must be accessed
first, followed by security Level 3.The passwords to gain access to security
Level 3 will be held by the OMC-R.
3. Enter the password to access the next level of security.
Enter the password... And the system Then continue with...

displays...
correctly in ROM... the new security level and "Identifying the faulty
the system prompt: devices" on page 4-15
Current security
level is x MMI-ROM
0115 -> Where x is the
new security level. Possible
values are:
• 2.
• 3.
correctly in RAM... the new security level and "Identifying the faulty
the system prompt: devices" on page 4-15
Current security
level is x MMI-RAM
0115 -> Where x is the
new security level. Possible
values are:
• 2.
• 3.
incorrectly the old security level and Step 2 and Step 3, until the
system prompt. system displays the new
security level.
4-14 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Identifying the faulty devices
Identifying the faulty devices

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Prerequisites
Before performing the steps in this procedure,:

• Locate the faulty cabinet.
• Connect the LMT.
Equipment safety
During replacement procedures, it may be possible to identify signs of damage caused by overheating,
short circuits or sudden component failure. This may indicate a problem that could repeat itself and cause
additional damage, or it could be a symptom of a failure elsewhere. Analysis of the problem may identify
common faults and make corrective action possible.
It is recommended that:
• The OMC-R is informed that an equipment safety problem has been identified.
• The steps for Reporting safety issues are followed. These are detailed in the introductory
section of this manual.
68P02902W76-B 4-15
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Identifying the faulty devices Chapter 4: Introduction to maintenance
Checking the alarm status
Use the following steps to check the status of the device reporting the alarm.
Devices that are Out Of Service (OOS) report an operational state of "disabled".
1. To enable alarm reporting, enter the following command at the LMT:
enable_alarm <site>
Where: is:
site 0 or BSC2 if the site is a
BSC2 site.
site 0 if the site is an RXCDR2
site.
2. To display a list of the currently active Fault Management Initiated Cleared (FMIC) and
Operator Initiated Cleared (OIC) alarms, enter the following command at the LMT:
disp_act_alarm <site>
Where: is:
site 0 or BSC2 if the site is a
BSC2 site.
site 0 if the site is an RXCDR2
site.
3. Observe the displayed alarm report and active alarm list.

The system now displays alarm reports as they occur. The module in the alarm report
is detecting the alarm.
4. Check to see if the module reporting the alarm, or that has an active alarm, is the same as the
module with a status LED indicating a fault.
This module may be the source of the fault. However, some other device, cable or shelf
could be causing the fault.
5. Look up the Device Alarm in the Device Alarms tables, detailed in Maintenance Information:
BSS Field Troubleshooting (68P02901W51).
There is an Alarm table for each device or digital board.
6. Diagnose the problem by following the Fault Diagnosis procedure indicated in the Device
Alarm table.
7. If necessary, use the module replacement procedures detailed in this manual to replace the
suspect module.
Additional fault isolation may be necessary if the module reporting the failure is replaced, placed in service
and new alarms are reported again. To perform this additional fault isolation, evaluate the actual alarm
message that the module is reporting. Refer to the GSM event/alarm messages in Maintenance Information:
Alarm Handling at the OMC-R (68P02901W26) for a list of valid alarm reports and alarm information details.
4-16 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Resetting and re-initializing a site
Resetting and re-initializing a site

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
BSS software commands cannot take BSSC3 cabinet power distribution unit modules Out of Service (OOS).
Procedure
Follow these steps to reset a site for power distribution unit module replacement.
Resetting the site takes the site out of service (OOS) and drops all calls. It is
advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic.
1. Enter reset_bss at the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT).
2. Replace the faulty module using the appropriate procedure.
3. Activate the front panel RESET switch on each of the following modules to re-initialize
the site and put it back In Service (INS).
1 MSI
1 KSWX
1 GPROC2
4. Verify the site automatically re-boots and is INS.
68P02902W76-B 4-17
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Resetting and re-initializing a site Chapter 4: Introduction to maintenance
4-18 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Chapter
5
Routine maintenance
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
68P02902W76-B 5-1
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Introduction to routine maintenance Chapter 5: Routine maintenance
Introduction to routine maintenance

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
This chapter contains the routine maintenance procedures for the BSSC3 cabinet.
Prerequisites
These procedures assume that field personnel are competent to work on Motorola BSSC3 equipment.
5-2 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Air filter replacement
Air filter replacement

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
As part of BSSC3 cabinet maintenance, air filters should be replaced every six months with new or previously
cleaned filters.
It is recommended that filters are not cleaned on site but replaced with new or previously cleaned filters.
Replacement procedure
Tools and equipment

This procedure requires the following tools and equipment.
• New or previously cleaned air filters.
Table 5-1 contains the details of the replacement air filter that can be ordered.
Table 5-1 Replacement air filters
Kit number Filter part number Description Approximate size

(10 Filters)
SVLN4958A 3586760W01 BSSC3 air filter 606 mm x 196 mm
Replacing the air filter

To replace the cabinet air filters proceed as follows:
1. Open the cabinet door.
2. Locate the filter to be replaced, and remove it by grasping the filter pull tab and pulling down
and then up, to release the filter from its position on the door.
3. Position the new or previously cleaned filter, and secure it into position by locating the bottom
of the filter into position first, followed by the top of the filter.
4. Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 for the second filter, as necessary.
5. Close and latch the cabinet door.
68P02902W76-B 5-3
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Air filter replacement Chapter 5: Routine maintenance
Air filter cleaning
Air filters removed from BSSC3 cabinets during air filter replacement must be cleaned prior to storing for
reuse. Follow the procedure detailed under Cleaning cabinet air filters later in this chapter, to correctly
clean used air filters.
5-4 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Cleaning cabinet air filters
Cleaning cabinet air filters

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
Follow these instructions to clean air filters, fitted to the cabinet, after they have been removed.
Tools and equipment
The cleaning of used air filters prior to storage requires the use of a vacuum cleaner.
Cleaning cabinet air filters
To clean a cabinet air filter:

1. Shake the filter to remove as much loose dust as possible.
2. Carefully vacuum the filter to remove any remaining dust.
Do not beat the filter against an object to loosen the dust, as this
may cause damage to the filter.
3. Inspect the filter for splits and holes. If the filter is undamaged it should be stored for reuse.
Discard damaged filters in accordance with local guide-lines.
68P02902W76-B 5-5
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Performing a physical inspection Chapter 5: Routine maintenance
Performing a physical inspection

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
General information
A physical inspection of the equipment should take place annually.

Motorola supplied equipment has a minimum environmental requirement. All indoor equipment is to be
installed in dry, cool, dust free conditions with adequate access and lighting. Temperature control must be
maintained with reference to the equipment heat dissipation figures specified in the relevant equipment
documentation and the surrounding environment.
Overall handling specifications:
• Storage:
1 Relative humidity: 8 to 100% non-condensing.
1 Temperature -45 to +70 °C.
• Operate:
1 Relative humidity: 5 to 95% non-condensing.
1 Temperature -5 to +45 °C.
• Dust: < 5 milligrams / 1000 cubic feet of air.
Equipment cabinets and most modules supplied by Motorola are protected by a painted finish. The surfaces of
the cabinets must be adequately protected from accidental damage at all times.
An Annual physical inspection checklist is supplied later in this chapter (see Table 5-2).
Safety
Exhaust and ventilation vents are not to be obscured by installation of cabinets, particular care should be taken
not to divert or restrict air conditioning airflow to operating equipment and any equipment present where the
installation in progress may interfere or hamper the airflow or generate adverse particulate matter.
Installation of any equipment must minimise the risk of personal injury, i.e. burrs removed, cable tie excess
tails cut flush, no loose cables, stable and secure cabinets and racks, no exposed conductors etc.
Protective blanks, bungs and shields should be complete and in position at all times other than necessary
for maintenance/installation.
5-6 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Performing a physical inspection
Cable tray
The cable tray is to be of suitable size and specification for its intended purpose. There should be sufficient
free space on the tray to allow cables to flow around corners without kinks or excessive bunching of the
runs. Correct fixtures and fittings shall be used as per manufacturers’ recommendations and as supplied by
Motorola. Under floor or wall tray is to be secured at a maximum of 1.5 metre intervals. The cable tray is
to be earthed to the main earth bar using a single earth cable and each section of tray is to be bonded to its
neighbour using the correct bonding leads. End plates and blanks shall be used when cable tray ends are not to
a terminated by a wall fixing.
Having equipment plumb and square increases the stability of units and reflects the amount of care that has
gone into planning the installation. Spirit levels and plumb lines or similar tools should be used throughout.
This directly demonstrates the quality and workmanship of the installation teams.
Power system
All exposed terminals should be covered using adequate insulation materials, that is, heatshrink or blanks.
Equipment racks and stacks should be securely bolted to the floor and if necessary equipment racks should
be top supported.
All conductor surfaces, that is, busbars, terminals, etc, should be protected against corrosion by the application
of an anti-oxidant compound.
Where a hazard to health exists, whether in the distribution, generation or storage stages of the power system,
it is to be clearly labelled as such. These warning labels should be located at the hazard point and on all access
doors into any equipment room where such a hazard is present.
Power system distribution interconnections should be made using stainless steel fixings. The use of any other
fixing will introduce corrosion and reduce the efficiency and life of the system.
Distribution busbars and cables should be clearly labelled at both ends with the correct colour coding and
circuit identification.
Each circuit breaker must be of the correct rating and must be clearly labelled to indicate the equipment
protected.
Cabling
All cables must be of the correct size and specification for their intended use, and, following installation,
should conform to IEC7671 or relevant local regulations.
Earthing
Earthing must be completed in accordance with Motorola document 68P81150E62 Earthing Guide-lines.
68P02902W76-B 5-7
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Annual physical inspection checklist Chapter 5: Routine maintenance
Annual physical inspection checklist

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose of the annual physical inspection
The annual physical inspection is to reveal whether each point is in accordance with Motorola installation
standards (Pass) or not (Fail). Where the equipment installation has been installed by the customer or party
not under the control of Motorola it is to be indicated by * (asterisk) in either the Pass or Fail column.
If there in no such item then indicate with N/A.
Using the checklist
To perform the annual physical inspection, use the checklist in Table 5-2. Tick against Pass or Fail for each
item checked. See Performing a physical inspection in this chapter for full details.
Table 5-2 Annual physical inspection checklist
Description of Check
Adequate clearance maintained for access,
1 Pass Fail
maintenance and cooling
Air conditioning is of adequate capacity and operating
2 Pass Fail
correctly
3 Burrs removed from all metalwork Pass Fail
Cabinets and racks are individually earthed to the
4 Pass Fail
main earth bar
5 Cable bridge earthed to external earth bar Pass Fail
Cable ends and terminations made up correctly with
6 Pass Fail
no exposed braid or conductor
7 Cable runs are neat and straight Pass Fail
Cable ties are cut flush with locking eye to prevent
8 Pass Fail
injury
Cable ties are neat, evenly spaced and of uniform
9 Pass Fail
type, colour and style of attachment
Cable ties do not compress, distort or damage any
10 Pass Fail
cables
Cable tray (internal) is earthed to main earth bar by
11 Pass Fail
single cable
Cont.
5-8 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Annual physical inspection checklist
Table 5-2 Annual physical inspection checklist (Continued)

12 Cable tray installed horizontal with respect to the floor Pass Fail
Cable tray is adequately supported to prevent
13 Pass Fail
movement
Cable tray is constructed and assembled using correct
14 Pass Fail
fixings
15 Cable tray is of adequate specification and size Pass Fail
16 Cable tray physically undamaged Pass Fail
Cable tray sections shall be bonded to their neighbour
17 Pass Fail
section correctly
18 Cables clearly labelled at both ends Pass Fail
19 Cables not "cut down" to fit. Pass Fail
20 Cables observe minimum bend radii Pass Fail
21 Cables of correct type and specification Pass Fail
22 Cables run to prevent injury or hazards Pass Fail
23 Circuit breakers correctly and clearly labelled Pass Fail
24 Circuit breakers of correct type and specification Pass Fail
DDF cable excess folded back and secured using
25 Pass Fail
"heatshrink"
26 End plates and blanks are used where necessary Pass Fail
27 Equipment clean and free from dust Pass Fail
28 Equipment physically undamaged Pass Fail
29 Equipment racks clearly labelled Pass Fail
Exposed metal conductor surfaces treated with anti
30 Pass Fail
oxidant compound
Earth bars are protected against corrosion using anti
31 Pass Fail
oxidant compound
32 Earth bars have only one connection per contact point Pass Fail
33 Earth cables correctly and individually labelled Pass Fail
Earthing connections to be made using stainless steel
34 Pass Fail
fixings and anti oxidant compound
Lightning arresters are of correct type and
35 Pass Fail
specification
No earth connection is made to galvanised or plated
36 Pass Fail
surfaces
37 Power cable lugs of correct type and size Pass Fail
Cont.
68P02902W76-B 5-9
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Annual physical inspection checklist Chapter 5: Routine maintenance
Table 5-2 Annual physical inspection checklist (Continued)

Power cables shall be correctly colour coded at both
38 Pass Fail
ends
Power cables connections tight and secured using
39 Pass Fail
stainless fixings
Protective covers, edging and grommets are fitted to
40 Pass Fail
protect cables
Punch block cables to not protrude more that 2 mm
41 Pass Fail
beyond the "cutter"
42 Shielded cables grounded at one end only (donor end) Pass Fail
43 Soldered connections are correctly made Pass Fail
44 Spare bungs and blanks shall be on site Pass Fail
45 Wire wrap connections have minimum 5 turns Pass Fail
Wire wrap connections not made to a previously
46 Pass Fail
soldered pin
5-10 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Chapter
6
FRU replacement procedures
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
68P02902W76-B 6-1
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Introduction to FRU replacement procedures Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Introduction to FRU replacement procedures

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Purpose
This chapter contains procedures for replacing various components within the BSSC3 cabinets.
Description
The OMC-R can often diagnose problems at the BSS site. The OMC-R:
• Receives alarms and statistics from the system.
• Interprets the alarms and statistics to pin-point problems in the system.
• Uses MMI command to try to further diagnose and possibly repair the system.
Sometimes the only possible way to fix the problem is to send field personnel to the BSS site to replace
a component in the cabinet.
As the OMC-R tries to diagnose the cause of the problems at the site, it may also be able to identify the
specific component that needs replacement. In these cases further diagnosis and testing may be unnecessary;
all that is required is to replace the component identified by the OMC-R.
The rest of this chapter contains instructions for replacing:
• The individual full size digital boards.
• The individual half size digital boards.
Chapter structure
The replacement procedures for the digital modules are listed alphabetically, by device name (for example,
CLKX, or GPROC2).
If there are different procedures for replacing a redundant device and a similar non-redundant device (such
as redundant and non-redundant CLKX modules) the instructions for replacing the redundant device
are given first.
6-2 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Interface board replacement
Interface board replacement

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
This section gives instructions for removing and replacing a Balanced line Interconnect Module 2 (BIM2) or
a Coaxial Interface Module (CIM). Since the procedure for both boards is the same, this section refers to
either board as an "interface board".
All channel traffic associated with an interface board is lost during the replacement
procedure. If only one 2.048 Mbit/s link is affected by an interface board fault,
replacement of the interface board should be performed during a period of low
traffic so as not to interrupt service on the other 2.048 Mbit/s links connected to
the interface board.
68P02902W76-B 6-3
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Interface board replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
BIM2 module
Figure 6-1 BIM2 Module
37-PIN D-TYPE E1/T1

LINE CONNECTOR
1:1 TURNS RATIO

TRANSFORMERS (X12)
37-PIN D-TYPE
INTERCONNECT
PANEL CONNECTOR
6-4 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Interface board replacement
CIM module
Figure 6-2 CIM Module
1:1.25 TURNS RATIO

TRANSFORMER (X12)
37-PIN D-TYPE
CONNECTOR
TYPE 43 COAXIAL
CONNECTORS (X 12)
68P02902W76-B 6-5
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Interface board replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Replacing an interface board
1. Enter the lock_device command to take the affected MMS device out of service (OOS).
MMS is the software name for the 2.048 Mbit/s links.
2. Note the order that the 2.048 Mbit/s links are connected to the interface board.
3. Disconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s links from the interface board.
4. Remove the four screws that secure the interface board to the cabinet interconnect panels.
5. Lift the interface board free to disconnect the 37-pin D connector.
6. Fit the replacement interface board to the 37-pin D connector on the cabinet interconnect panel.
7. Secure the interface board to the interconnect panel using the four screws removed in Step 4.
8. Reconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s links to the replacement interface board.
9. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the MMS device back in service (INS).
6-6 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement
Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module

replacement
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and replacing redundant clock extender modules (CLKXs).
Never look into disconnected fibre optic cables or into fibre optic connectors, as
these may emit laser radiation harmful to eyesight.
68P02902W76-B 6-7
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
CLKX module
Figure 6-3 Clock Extender (CLKX) module
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
SIX FIBRE OPTIC

CLOCK OUTPUTS TO
LOCAL KSWXS
6-8 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement
Replacing CLKX A
Follow these steps to replace CLKX A.
Replacing redundant CLKX modules may cause a system glitch when the CLKXs are being
switched.
1. Pull the CLKX forward just enough to disconnect it from the module backplane. This
forces a changeover to CLKX B modules.
2. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the CLKX A module to be replaced.
3. Remove the CLKX A module and insert the replacement CLKX.
4. Reconnect all the fibre optic cables.
Fibre optic cables used in conjunction with a CLKX board to transfer clock
signals from a parent shelf to remote shelves, must be of the same length to
maintain site synchronization integrity.
5. Push the CLKX back into the shelf until it connects to the backplane.
Replacing CLKX B
Follow these steps to replace CLKX B.

1. Pull the CLKX forward just enough to disconnect it from the module backplane. This forces a
changeover to CLKX A modules.
2. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the CLKX B module to be replaced.
3. Remove the CLKX B module and insert the replacement CLKX.
5. Push the CLKX back into the shelf until it connects to the backplane.
68P02902W76-B 6-9
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Non-redundant CLKX replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Non-redundant CLKX replacement

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and replacing non-redundant clock extender modules
(CLKXs).
Replacing the CLKX
Follow these instructions to remove and replace the CLKX.
Replacing stand-alone CLKX modules causes system down-time.

1. Disconnect all the fibre optic cables from the CLKX to be replaced.
2. Remove the faulty CLKX.
3. Insert the replacement CLKX.
Fibre optic cables used in conjunction with a CLKX board to transfer clock
signals from a parent shelf to remote shelves, must be of the same length to
maintain site synchronization integrity.
6-10 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Redundant GCLK module replacement
Redundant GCLK module replacement

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant generic clock (GCLK) modules.
Illustration
Figure 6-4 GCLK module
BACKPLANE
ALARM (RED) LED, NORMALLY OFF

ACTIVE (GREEN) LED. MASTER = ON
E1/T1 IN
16.364 MHz OUT
6.12 s OUT
60 ms OUT
125 ms OUT
EARTH
FREQUENCY ADJUST
68P02902W76-B 6-11
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Redundant GCLK module replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Replacing a redundant GCLK
To replace a redundant GCLK module:

1. Connect a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of the master GPROC2.
Refer to "Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)" on page 4-11, in Chapter
1 for instructions.
Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master GPROC2. However,
if the master is unavailable, the LMT can be connected to any available GPROC2.
If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC-R must enter all MMI commands.
2. Determine which GCLK card needs replacement.

Use the following table to determine the next action to take.
If... Then...
the master GCLK card needs replacement...
• In a TTY window, enter the
swap_devices command to tell the
software to make the redundant GCLK
the master.
• Continue on to Step 1.
the standby GCLK card... Continue on to Step 1.
1. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty GCLK out of
service (OOS).
2. Disable the faulty GCLK using the front panel switch.
3. Remove the faulty GCLK.
4. Insert the replacement GCLK.
5. Ensure front panel switch is set for normal operation.
6. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacement GCLK
back in service (INS).
6-12 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Non-redundant GCLK replacement
Non-redundant GCLK replacement

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing non-redundant Generic Clock (GCLK) modules.
Prerequisites
If one is not already connected, connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of the master
GPROC2.
Refer to "Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)" on page 4-11, in Chapter 1 for instructions.
Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master GPROC2. However, if the master is
unavailable, the LMT can connect to any available GPROC2.
Shelf configurations
There are two configurations that may require GCLK replacement. The following table shows the two
configurations and which instructions apply.
If the cabinet contains: Follow the steps in:

A single BSU shelf Replacing a Single Shelf Configuration GCLK
in this section
More than one BSU shelf Replacing a Multi-Shelf Configuration GCLK
in this section.
Follow the appropriate procedure to replace a non-redundant GCLK.
68P02902W76-B 6-13
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Non-redundant GCLK replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Replacing a GCLK in a single shelf configuration
To replace a GCLK in a single-shelf configuration cabinet:

1. Insert the replacement GCLK into the empty GCLK slot.
2. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the replacement GCLK.
in-service (INS).
4. Wait at least 30 minutes for the GCLK to stabilize.
5. In a TTY window, enter the state command to verify the operational and administrative
state of the GCLK.
6. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty GCLK
out-of-service (OOS).
7. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty GCLK.
9. Secure a blanking plate to the empty GCLK slot..
6-14 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Non-redundant GCLK replacement
Replacing a GCLK in a multi-shelf configuration
To replace a GCLK in a multi-shelf configuration cabinet:
If the system is operational, module replacement will cause down-time for the
entire system.
1. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty GCLK out-of-service
(OOS).
2. Disable the faulty GCLK using the front panel switch.
4. Insert the replacement GCLK.
in-service (INS).
6. Wait at least 30 minutes for the GCLK to stabilize.
7. In a TTY window, enter the state command to verify the operational and administrative
state of the GCLK.
68P02902W76-B 6-15
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Calibrating the GCLK Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Calibrating the GCLK

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
Follow this procedure to calibrate the GCLK in the field. The GCLK must be calibrated when more than one
frame slip per hour is observed or when the GCLK is phase locked to the E1/T1 serial data stream and the
system requests calibration.
The GCLK must be calibrated only by fully trained GSM qualified staff. Do not
attempt this procedure under any circumstances unless the test equipment listed
below is available.
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required:

• An IBM-compatible personal computer (PC) with PC Plus or equivalent terminal emulator
software.
• An RS232 9 to 25-way cable.
• A rubidium standard.
• Universal counter - Hewlett Packard Model HP5385A or equivalent.
• Screened coaxial cable - BNC to 2 mm multicontact AG connector.
• New calibration sticker(s).
• A non-ferrous tuning tool.
6-16 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Calibrating the GCLK
Commands
The following commands must be used to calibrate the GCLK:
Command Function
disp_equipment Displays the active equipment at a specified site.
state Displays the status of specified devices or functions.
chg_element phase_lock_gclk <value> Turns the phase lock function on or off, where
<location> <value> is 0 for off and 1 for on, and <location> is
the site id.
disp_element phase_lock_gclk Shows the status of the phase lock function
<location> <location> is the site id.
clear_gclk_avgs <location> gclk_id> Clears LTA values in memory for a specified GCLK.
Process
To calibrate the GCLK follow these procedures:

• Initial preparation.
• GCLK calibration.
Before attempting this process record the board serial number, date of last calibration and present frequency
on the calibration record shown at the end of this section, and remove the old calibration stickers from
the GCLK front panels.
68P02902W76-B 6-17
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Calibrating the GCLK Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Initial preparation
1. Connect the serial A port on the PC to a GPROC2 TTY port using the 9 to 25-way RS232 cable.
2. At the PC start the terminal emulator program.
3. Connect the output from the 10 MHz standard to the reference input of the frequency counter,
select external standard.
4. Set the frequency gate time to 10 second and set the display to give 10 significant digits.
5. To check to see if phase lock is on, at the CUST MMI prompt type:
disp_element phase_lock_gclk <location>
Where: is:
<location> 0 or bsc, for a BSC20 for an
RXCDR2.
This gives the status of phase lock at the site, 0 is shown for phase lock off and 1 is shown
for phase lock on.
6. If phase lock is on, at the CUST MMI prompt type:

chg_element phase_lock_gclk 0 <location>
Where: is:
<location> 0 or bsc, for a BSC20 for a
RXCDR2.
This turns off the phase lock to the selected site.
7. At the CUST MMI prompt type:

disp_equip<site number>
This gives the device id of the GCLKs.

state<site number>GCLK<dev id><dev id><dev id>
This displays the status for the GCLK.

clear_gclk_avgs <location> <gclk_id>
Where: is:
<location> 0 or bsc, for a BSC20 for a
RXCDR2.
<gclk_id> 0 or 1.
This clears the LTA values for the specified GCLK.
6-18 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Calibrating the GCLK
GCLK calibration
1. Connect the frequency counter to the front panel 16.384 MHz connection of the GCLK.
2. Connect the cable to the input port of the frequency counter and the jack plug end to the front
panel of the GCLK 16.384 MHz output and earth respectively.
3. Using a non-ferrous tuning tool, adjust the potentiometer labelled FREQ ADJUST on the
GCLK to 16.384 MHz. The GSM specified tolerance is +/- 0.8 Hz, although it is desirable
(and should be possible) to adjust the frequency more accurately than this. This reads as
16.384 000 00 on the frequency counter. Adjusting the potentiometer clockwise increases
the frequency and anti-clockwise decreases the frequency.
4. Repeat Initial preparation Step 7 to GCLK calibration Step 3 if the other GCLK is to be
calibrated.
5. If phase locking of the GCLK(S) at the site is required type:

chg_element phase_lock_gclk 1 <location>
This turns the phase lock on for the specified site.
6. Place a new calibration sticker, indicating the date of calibration, over the potentiometer
labelled FREQ ADJUST on each calibrated GCLK.
GCLK calibration record form
An example of the GCLK calibration record form is shown below:

SITE NAME ........................................ TESTER'S NAMES
SITE ID .............................................. .....................................
.....................................
SERIAL DATE
NUMBER OF FREQUENCY
OF DATE LAST BEFORE
BOARD CALIBRATION CALIBRATION
68P02902W76-B 6-19
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GPROC2/GPROC3 replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
GPROC2/GPROC3 replacement
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section applies to replacing both GPROC2 and GPROC3 boards. In the text, for GPROC3,
read GPROC2 as appropriate.
This section provides the procedure for replacing redundant and non-redundant General Processor (GPROC3)
boards.
Redundant GPROC2 considerations
If the processing capability of a GPROC3 in a redundant system fails, the redundant GPROC3 should be
loaded automatically with the appropriate code and enabled. The system then takes the failed GPROC3 Out
Of Service (OOS). Therefore, no ill effects should be seen during GPROC3 replacement.
Non-redundant GPROC3 considerations
If a non-redundant system is still operational, GPROC3 replacement may cause a temporary system glitch
when the GPROC3s are switched.
Device information required
The OMC-R must determine the following:

• Site number.
• Device ID.
• Cage number.
• Slot number.
6-20 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 GPROC2/GPROC3 replacement
Locating the faulty GPROC3
Use the information from the OMC-R together with the LED displays on the GPROC3s to locate the faulty
board.
Table 6-1 shows the various LED displays.
Table 6-1 GPROC3 LED meanings
If the Green LED is... And the Red LED is... The board is... Additional action...
on... off... either: no further action is
necessary.
• operating normally
• may be unequipped
Use the site command
to verify whether the
board is equipped or not.
flashing.. off...
flashing.. flashing.. waiting for code to
download...
flashing.. on... in an alarm condition... continue with Removing
the GPROC3.
off... on...
on... on...
off... off... not receiving dc power...
68P02902W76-B 6-21
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Removing the GPROC3
Follow these steps to set up the GPROC3 replacement:
Do not exchange all GPROC3s connected to one LAN simultaneously or all DTE
addresses will be lost.
1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of a GPROC3.

Refer to "Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)" on page 4-11, beginning in
Chapter 1 for instructions.
if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available GPROC3.
If an LMT is unavailable the OMC-R must enter all the MMI commands.
2. Enter the lock_device command to lock the faulty GPROC3.
3. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch of the faulty GPROC3 to the down (DISABLE) position
and remove the faulty GPROC3.
6-22 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 GPROC2/GPROC3 replacement
Installing the GPROC3
Follow these steps to install a replacement GPROC3.
Replacing the master GPROC3 will cause a site outage.
1. Insert the replacement GPROC3 into the empty GPROC3 slot.

Make sure the GPROC3 locks firmly into the backplane.
2. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch of the replacement GPROC3 to the middle (normal
operation) position.
3. The DTE addresses of a replacement master GPROC3 must be checked to ensure that it is
correct for the site in which it is installed.
4. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to inform the software to load code
into the replacement GPROC3.
5. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacement GPROC3
back in service (INS).
68P02902W76-B 6-23
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GPROC3 module
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
ALARM LED ACTIVE LED

(RED) (GREEN) RESET/DISABLE
SWITCH TTY CONNECTOR
(OPTICALLY ISOLATED
TEST PORT)
GREEN LED ON, RED LED = PROCESSOR RUNNING, NO FAILURES

GREEN LED OFF, RED LED ON = PROCESSOR HALTED, OR IN RESET
BOTH LEDS ON = PROCESSOR RUNNING, MODULE IS DISABLED OR OTHER ALARM
DOWN = DISABLE
6-24 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Redundant DSW2 replacement
Redundant DSW2 replacement

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
The procedure in this section may also be used to replace legacy KSW modules. In the text, for
DSW2 read KSW as appropriate.
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant DSW2s.
Prerequisites
Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) before performing this procedure.

unavailable, the LMT can connect to any available GPROC2.
Refer to "Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)" on page 4-11 in Chapter 1 for instructions.
68P02902W76-B 6-25
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Redundant DSW2 replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
DSW2 module
Figure 6-6 DSW2 module
Backplane connector
Alarm (Red) LED.

Normally OFF
Active (Green) LED.

Normally ON
RESET/DISABLE
switch
6-26 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Redundant DSW2 replacement
Follow these steps to replace a redundant DSW2.
Module replacement may cause system down time.
If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC-R must enter this command.

1. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to tell the software to switch to
the replacement DSW2 (A/B).
2. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty DSW2
3. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty DSW2.
4. Remove the faulty DSW2.
5. Insert the replacement DSW2.
6. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch to the NORMAL OPERATION (middle) position.
7. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the replacement DSW2.
8. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacement DSW2
in-service (INS).
68P02902W76-B 6-27
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Non-redundant DSW2 module replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Non-redundant DSW2 module replacement

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
The procedure in this section may also be used to replace legacy KSW modules. In the text, for
DSW2 read KSW as appropriate.
This section contains instructions for replacing non-redundant double kiloport switches (DSW2s).
Prerequisites
Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) before performing this procedure.

unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available GPROC2.
6-28 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Non-redundant DSW2 module replacement
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace the DSW2.
Module replacement may cause a short site outage when DSW2s are switched.
1. Insert the replacement DSW2 into an empty DSW2 slot.
If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC-R must enter the following commands.
2. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the replacement DSW2.
3. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacement DSW2
in-service (INS).
4. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to tell the software to switch to
the replacement DSW2 (A/B).
5. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty DSW2 out-of-service
(OOS).
6. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty DSW2.
7. Remove the faulty DSW2.
68P02902W76-B 6-29
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Redundant DSWX module replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Redundant DSWX module replacement

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant double kiloport switch extender (DSWX) modules
The procedure in this section may also be used to replace legacy KSWX modules. In the text, for
DSWX read KSWX as appropriate.
Module replacement will cause the site to self-reset. It is recommended that

network appropriate action be implemented to minimize the effects of the reset
when the DSWXs are switched.
6-30 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Redundant DSWX module replacement
DSWX illustration
Figure 6-7 double kiloport switch extender (DSWX) module
Fibre optic input

from another
DSWX/KSWX

input from Green LED
clock
RESET/DISABLE
switch
Fibre optic
output to another
DSWX/KSWX
68P02902W76-B 6-31
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Redundant DSWX module replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
LED indications
The indications for the redundant and non-redundant DSWX are shown in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 DSWX LED indications
LED (Green) Meaning

Lit DSWX in local slot and
DSWX is master and
DSWX is receiving clocks from the fibre port and
No GCLK alarms and
No TDM receive violations from the fibre port and
KSW not present
or
DSWX in local slot and
DSWX is master and
No GCLK alarms and
KSW is present
or
DSWX in remote or expansion slot and
No GCLK alarms and
No TDM receive violations from the fibre port
Flashing DSWX in local slot and

DSWX is slave and
No GCLK alarms and
No TDM receive violations from the fibre port and
KSW not present
or
DSWX in local slot and
DSWX is slave and
No GCLK alarms and
KSW is present
OFF When any of the lit or flashing criteria are not present or no power
to the card
6-32 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Redundant DSWX module replacement
Replacing DSWX A or B
Follow these step to replace a DSWX A or DSWX B.

1. Take network appropriate actions to use DSWX B modules only or DSWX A modules only.
The set that do not contain the faulty DSWX are to be used.
2. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the faulty DSWX.
3. Remove the faulty DSWX.
4. Install the replacement DSWX in the slot from which the faulty DSWX was removed.
5. Reconnect all fibre optic cables.
6. If required, take network appropriate actions to restore DSWX usage back to the set from
which the faulty module was removed.
The fibre optic cables used with the DSWX cards to extend/expand the TDM
highway, from one BSU3/RXU3 to another BSU3/RXU3, must be of the same
length. This allows correct operation of the TDM highway to be maintained.
68P02902W76-B 6-33
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Non-redundant DSWX module replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Non-redundant DSWX module replacement

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing non-redundant double kiloport switch extender (DSWX)
modules
The procedure in this section may also be used to replace legacy KSWX modules. In the text, for
DSWX read KSWX as appropriate.
Follow these steps to replace a non-redundant kiloport switch extender module.

1. Disconnect all fibre optic cables from the faulty DSWX.
2. Remove the faulty DSWX.
3. Install the replacement DSWX in the slot from which the fault DSWX was removed.
The fibre optic cables used with the DSWX cards to extend/expand the TDM
highway, from one BSU3/RXU3 to another BSU3/RXU3, must be of the same
length. This allows correct operation of the TDM highway to be maintained.
6-34 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Redundant LANX replacement
Redundant LANX replacement

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant local area network extender (LANX) cards.
There are two sets of instructions:
• Replacing the LANX associated with the active LAN.
• Replacing the LANX associated with the standby LAN.
Follow the instructions that fit the prevailing situation.
68P02902W76-B 6-35
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Redundant LANX replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
LANX module illustration
Figure 6-8 LANX module
Backplane
connector
Fibre optic input from

another LANX in
site
Fibre optic output to
another LANX in
site Rotary switch for
setting shelf to
number
6-36 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Redundant LANX replacement
Prerequisites
Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) before replacing this module.

unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available GPROC2.
Refer to "Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)" on page 4-11 in Chapter 1 for instructions.
Replacing the LANX associated with the active LAN
Follow these steps to replace the LANX card for the active LAN.
Module replacement will cause system down time.
1. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to tell the software to use the standby
LAN.
2. Disconnect all fibre optic cables from the faulty LANX card.
3. Remove the LANX card.
4. Install the replacement LANX card in the slot from which the faulty LANX card was removed.
6. Wait about 30 seconds.
7. Enter the state command to verify that one LAN device is busy and unlocked (active) and
one LAN is enabled and unlocked (standby).
8. Enter the swap_device command to swap the active LAN back to standby and the
replacement LAN to active.
68P02902W76-B 6-37
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Redundant LANX replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Replacing the LANX associated with the standby LAN
Follow these steps to replace the LANX card for the standby LAN.
1. Disconnect all the fibre optic cables from the faulty LANX card.
2. Remove the LANX card.
5. Wait about 30 seconds.
6. Enter the state command to verify that one LAN device is busy and unlocked (active) and
one LAN is enabled and unlocked (standby)
It may take the system up to 30 seconds to bring the standby LAN back in-service
(INS).
6-38 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Non-redundant LANX replacement
Non-redundant LANX replacement

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing non-redundant local area network extender (LANX) cards.
LAN-A bus is controlled by the local area network extender module (LANX) module in upper slot 20 of
the digital module shelf. LAN-B bus is controlled by the LANX module in upper slot 19 of the digital
module shelf.
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a non-redundant LANX module.
Module replacement will cause system down time.
1. Disconnect all fibre optic cables from the faulty LANX card.
2. Remove the faulty LANX card.
68P02902W76-B 6-39
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
MSI replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
MSI replacement
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing the Multiple Serial Interface (MSI) module.
MSI module
Figure 6-9 Multiple serial interface (MSI) module
ALARM (RED) LED,

NORMALLY OFF
ACTIVE (GREEN) LED,
NORMALLY ON
RESET/DISABLE
SWITCH
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
6-40 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 MSI replacement
Non-redundant systems
The following table shows the effects of replacing MSI boards in non redundant systems.
If the MSI being replaced... Then...

can still carry some channel traffic capacity for all associated
E1 links is lost during MSI replacement.
cannot carry any channel traffic no other ill effects will be noticed.
Redundant systems
MSI replacement should be transparent to the user in a redundant system.
Follow these steps to replace an MSI board.

1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of a GPROC2.
Refer to "Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)" on page 4-11 in Chapter
1 for instructions.
If an LMT is unavailable the OMC-R must invoke all MMI commands.
2. Enter the lock_device command to take the MSI out of service (OOS).
3. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty MSI
board.
4. Remove the faulty MSI board.
5. Install the replacement MSI board in the slot from which the faulty MSI board was removed.
6. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch to reset, then back to the NORMAL OPERATION position
to bring the board into normal operating mode.
7. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the MSI board back
in-service (INS).
68P02902W76-B 6-41
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GDP2 replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
GDP2 replacement
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing a Generic DSP Processor 2 (GDP2) module.
Information in this section may be used to replace legacy GDP modules. In the text, for GDP2
read GDP as appropriate.
The legacy GDP has two configured types, one for E1 serial line use and one for T1 serial line
use. Each GDP type has a different framer/transceiver with accompanying crystal oscillator, and
two associated resistors. This means that a GDP used for E1 serial line use cannot be used for T1,
and a GDP used for T1 serial line use cannot be used for E1.
Non-redundant Systems
The following table shows the effects of replacing GDP2 boards in non redundant systems.
If the GDP2 being replaced... Then...

can still carry some channel traffic... capacity for all E1/T1 links is lost during GDP2
replacement.
cannot carry any channel traffic... no other ill effects will be noticed.
Redundant Systems
Where redundancy is configured, GDP2 replacement should be transparent to the system.
6-42 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 GDP2 replacement
GDP2 module
Figure 6-10 GDP2 module
Alarm (Red) LED. Backplane

Normally OFF Connector
Active ( Green) LED.

Normally ON
RESET/DISABLE
switch
68P02902W76-B 6-43
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
GDP2 replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Follow these steps to replace a GDP2 transcoder module.

1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) and connect it to the TTY port of a GPROC2.
Refer to "Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)" on page 4-11 in Chapter
1 for instructions.
If an LMT is unavailable the OMC-R must invoke all MMI commands.
2. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the GDP2 card out of service
(OOS).
3. Set the front panel switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty GDP2 card.
4. Remove the faulty GDP2 card.
5. Install the replacement GDP2 card in the slot from which the faulty GDP2 card was removed.
6. Set the front panel switch to the NORMAL OPERATION (middle) position.
7. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacement GDP2 card
in-service (INS).
6-44 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 NVM replacement
NVM replacement
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section contains the information required to replace a faulty NVM board.
Do Not remove the PCMCIA card from faulty NVM boards being returned to
Motorola for repair. The returned unit must comprise the NVM board with PCMCIA
card installed.
Notify the OMC-R before carrying out the following replacement procedures.
Diagnosing faults on the NVM board
Fault diagnosis is limited to viewing the front panel LEDs and ensuring that the switches are set to the
correct positions for normal operation.
68P02902W76-B 6-45
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
NVM replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Replacing the NVM board
Carry out the following procedure to replace a faulty NVM board. This procedure assumes that the
BSC2/RXCDR2 is already initialized.
The NVM board contains devices that are sensitive to static. A suitable earth strap
must be worn when handling the module.
1. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch to the DISABLE position.
2. When the red ALARM LED illuminates, remove the NVM board from the slot in the cage.
3. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch on the new NVM board to DISABLE and then insert the
board into the slot, ensuring that it locks firmly into the backplane.
4. Move the RESET/DISABLE switch up to the RESET position and release. Once the software
recognizes the NVM board, the red ALARM LED extinguishes and the green ACTIVE LED
illuminates to show that the NVM board is operational.
When the software recognizes the PCMCIA card in slot 1, the green CARD 1 STATUS LED
illuminates to show that the PCMCIA card is operational.
The procedure for replacing the NVM board is now complete.
6-46 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 NVM replacement
NVM module
Figure 6-11 NVM module details
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
NVM BOARD
STATUS LEDs
NVM BOARD
RESET/DISABLE
SWITCH
PCMCIA CARD
STATUS LEDs
EJECT BUTTON
PCMCIA CARD
SLOTS
PCMCIA CARD SWAP
SWITCH
Do not use the PCMCIA card eject button. This feature is not currently supported.
Do not use the PCMCIA CARD SWAP switch. This feature is not currently supported.
68P02902W76-B 6-47
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
PIX replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
PIX replacement
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing a parallel interface extender (PIX) module in an external
alarm system.
PIX module
Figure 6-12 PIX module
Backplane connector
Green Alarm LED

ON = no alarms
OFF = customer alarm
detected
Connector is cabled
to top of cabinet for
interconnect to
customer
equipment
6-48 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 PIX replacement
Replacing the PIX
Follow these steps to replace a PIX module.
Replacing this module may trigger false customer alarms.
1. Disconnect interconnect cable from the front of the faulty PIX module.
2. Remove the faulty PIX module.
3. Install the replacement PIX card in the slot from which the faulty PIX module was removed.
4. Reconnect the interconnect cable to the front of the PIX module.
68P02902W76-B 6-49
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Power supply module replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Power supply module replacement

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing power supply modules.

These are two sets of instructions:
• Replacing a non-redundant power supply module.
• Replacing a redundant power supply module.
Applications
This procedure applies to all of the various power supply modules used in Motorola BSC2 cabinets, including:
• EPSMs.
• IPSM2s.
6-50 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Power supply module replacement
Power supply module
Figure 6-13 shows the EPSM. The IPSM2 is very similar in outward appearance. LED positions may differ.
Figure 6-13 EPSM

(FEMALE)
+5 V
+5 V

V RTN (0 V INPUT)
V IN (+27 V INPUT)
ACTIVE LED (GREEN):

ON WHEN OUTPUT VOLTAGES
ARE PRESENT AND WITHIN
TOLERANCE.
ALARM LED (RED):

ON WHEN ONE OR MORE ALARM
CONDITIONS EXISTS.
OFF WHEN NO ALARM CONDITION
EXISTS.
ti-GSM-BSC/RXCDR-00036a-v01-ai-sw
68P02902W76-B 6-51
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Power supply module replacement Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Replacing a non-redundant power supply module
Follow these steps to replace a non-redundant power supply module
If the shelf served by the faulty power supply module is still operational, module replacement
should be transparent to the system.
Do not mix power supply modules; for example, if a cabinet is equipped with
EPSMs, do not try to insert an IPSM2.
Always replace a power supply module with the same type of module!
1. Remove the air baffle from the unused slot.
2. Install the replacement power supply module in the empty slot.
3. Remove the faulty power supply module.
4. Re-install the air baffle in the slot from which the faulty PSM was removed.
Replacing a redundant power supply module
Follow these steps to replace a redundant power supply module:
If the shelf served by the faulty power supply module is still operational, module replacement
should be transparent to the system.
1. Remove the faulty power supply module.
2. Install the replacement power supply module in the empty slot from which the faulty PSM
was removed in the previous step.
6-52 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Replacing a fan unit
Replacing a fan unit

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
This section contains information on replacing faulty fan units in a BSSC3 cabinet.
Fan module
Figure 6-14 Typical fan unit
Fan replacement
Preparation
1. Locate the faulty fan.
2. The fan can be ’hot-plugged’. It is not therefore necessary to remove the fuse. After removing
the fan, check that the fuse is not blown as a result of the original fan fault. Replace the
fuse if necessary. .
68P02902W76-B 6-53
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Replacing a fan unit Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures
Removing the fan

To remove the faulty fan:
1. The fan is secured by two compression latches. To release the fan, lift the latches to the
horizontal position to decompress the latch mechanism.
2. By holding the latches, pull the fan outward, away from the cabinet. This action automatically
disconnects the power from the fan.
Installing the fan

To install the new fan:
1. Ensure the two compression latches are in the horizontal position.
2. Push the fan fully into the fan assembly housing. The power connection is automatically made
when the fan is fully inserted into the fan assembly housing. Provided the fuse is good, the
fan will start to operate.
3. Move the latches into the vertical position, which will compress the latch mechanism to hold
the fan unit firmly in the assembly housing.
Restoration
1. When the fan is operating, advise the OMC-R that the repair is complete and check that fuse
and fan alarms at the OMC-R are cleared.
6-54 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Chapter
7
Non FRU replacement procedures
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
68P02902W76-B 7-1
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Miscellaneous repair procedures Chapter 7: Non FRU replacement procedures
Miscellaneous repair procedures

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
This chapter contains instructions for removing and replacing various components not classed as FRUs, and
includes:
• Bus terminator cards.
• DAB2.
• Digital card cage.
Usually, replacement of any of these items is first recommended by Motorola, through its local offices.
Obtaining replacement authorization
Failure of these items is unusual. Several of the replacement procedures require authorization or special parts
from Motorola. The replaceable modules are not part of standard replacement kit.
Contact the local Motorola office BEFORE attempting to replace these modules.
7-2 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)
Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overview
If AMR hardware is installed, throughout this section read KSW as DSW2, where appropriate.
There are only two bus terminator cards (BTC) fitted in a shelf. There are no redundant BTCs to come into
service when a BTC is removed. However, a BTC can be fitted into the KSW cards position, which is
adjacent to the faulty BTC, to maintain the bus. Consequently BTC replacement procedures are split into two
groups: non-redundant KSWs and redundant KSWs.
These procedures require authorization or special parts from Motorola. The replaceable modules are not part
of standard replacement kit.
Contact the local Motorola office BEFORE attempting to replace this module.
Non-redundant KSWs
Follow the appropriate procedure according to the conditions that currently apply, as shown in the decision
table below.
68P02902W76-B 7-3
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC) Chapter 7: Non FRU replacement procedures
Conditions
There are 5 different procedures according to the conditions that apply:
If these conditions apply: Follow the steps in:

"Procedure 1" on page 7-5.
• Replacing BTC 0 (left side).
• KSW A is in the shelf.
• Spare KSW and BTC are available

• Replacing BTC 0 (left side).
• KSW B is in the shelf.
• A spare BTC is available.

• Replacing BTC 1 (right side).
• Spare KSW and BTC are available.

• Replacing BTC 1 (right side).

• Replacing BTC 0 or BTC 1.
• A redundant KSW is in the shelf.
7-4 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Procedure 1
Follow these steps to replace BTC 0 when:

• A spare KSW and BTC are available.
This Procedure contains three sub-procedures:

• Preparing the cabinet.
• Replacing the BTC.
• Restoring the cabinet.
Module replacement should be transparent to the system. The system retains as

much system functionality as possible.
Preparing the cabinet

Follow these steps to prepare the cabinet for BTC replacement.
1. Insert a spare KSW into the empty slot 1 (KSW B).
2. Connect an LMT, if one is not already available.

Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT), in Chapter 1 for instructions.
3. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the spare KSW.
4. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the spare KSW in-service
(INS).
Replacing the BTC

Follow these steps to replace the BTC.
1. Enter the swap_device command to inform the software to switch to KSW B.
2. Disable KSW A in slot 27 using its front panel switch and remove KSW A.
3. Insert the spare BTC into slot 27.
4. Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of BTC 0 in slot
28 and remove BTC 0.
5. Insert the replacement BTC into slot 28 (BTC 0) and refit the extractor tabs.
68P02902W76-B 7-5
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Restoring the cabinet

1. Remove the spare BTC from slot 27.
2. Re-insert KSW A into slot 27.
3. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring KSW A in-service (INS).
4. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to inform the software to switch
back to KSW A.
5. Remove the spare KSW B from slot 1.
Procedure 2


• Insert a spare BTC into the empty slot 27 (KSW A).
• Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of BTC 0 in slot
28 and remove BTC 0.
• Insert the replacement BTC into slot 28 (BTC 0) and refit the extractor tabs.
• Remove the spare BTC from slot 27.
7-6 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Procedure 3

• A spare KSW and BTC are available.
This Procedure contains three sub-procedures:



Follow these steps to prepare the cabinet for BTC replacement.
1. Insert a spare KSW into the empty slot 27 (KSW A).

3. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the spare KSW.
4. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the spare KSW in-service
(INS).
Replacing the BTC

Follow these steps to replace the BTC.
1. Enter the swap_device command to inform the software to switch to KSW A.
2. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take KSW B out-of-service (OOS).
3. Disable KSW B in slot 1 using its front panel switch and remove KSW B.
4. Insert the spare BTC into slot 1.
5. Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of BTC 1 in slot 0
and remove BTC 1.
6. Insert the replacement BTC into slot 0 (BTC 1) and refit the extractor tabs.
68P02902W76-B 7-7
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02

1. Remove the spare BTC from slot 1.
2. Re-insert KSW B into slot 1.
3. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring KSW B in-service (INS).
4. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to inform the software to switch
back to KSW B.
5. Remove the spare KSW A from slot 27.
Procedure 4


• Insert a spare BTC into the empty slot 1 (KSW B).
• Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of BTC 1 in slot 0
and remove BTC 1.
• Insert the replacement BTC into slot 0 (BTC 1) and refit the extractor tabs.
• Remove the spare BTC from slot 1.
Redundant KSWs.
The following procedure details the steps for replacing a faulty BTC, in a shelf configured with a redundant
KSW card.
Module replacement should be transparent to the system. The system retains as much system
functionality as possible.
7-8 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Procedure 5
Follow these steps to replace BTC 0 or BTC 1 when:

• Both KSW A and KSW B are installed and configured.
This procedure contains three sub-procedures:


2. If necessary, in a TTY window enter the swap_devices command to make the KSW,
adjacent to the faulty BTC card, redundant.
3. In a TTY window, enter the lock_devices command to take the redundant KSW card
Replacing the BTC

1. Disable the redundant KSW card using its front panel switch and remove it from the shelf.
2. Insert the spare BTC card into the vacant slot.
3. Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of the faulty BTC
card and remove it from the shelf.
4. Insert the replacement BTC card and refit the extractor tabs.
5. Remove the spare BTC card installed in Step 2.
6. Refit the KSW card removed in Step 1, ensuring the front panel switch is set to the NORMAL
OPERATING position.

1. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the KSW in-service (INS).
2. If necessary, enter the swap_devices command to make the refitted KSW the master
for the shelf.
3. Disconnect the LMT, connected in Step 1 of Preparing the cabinet sub procedure.
68P02902W76-B 7-9
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Replacing the alarm board (DAB2) Chapter 7: Non FRU replacement procedures
Replacing the alarm board (DAB2)

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
This section explains how to replace a distribution alarm board (DAB2).
Mains power is present on the DAB2 connector until power is removed from
the cabinet.
Background
Although the DAB2 can be replaced in the field, it is not considered a "field replaceable" board.
Replacing a DAB2 is an extraordinary action which requires consultation with and authorization from the
local Motorola office and the CNRC.
Contact the local Motorola office before attempting to replace a DAB2.
7-10 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Replacing the alarm board (DAB2)
Precautions
Follow these precautions when removing or replacing the DAB2:

• Contact the local Motorola office for advice and authorization before attempting this procedure.
Do not perform this procedure until all power has been removed
from the cabinet!
• Switch off all power to the cabinet. If possible, disconnect the power cables from the top of
the cabinet.
• Do not cross input cables.

Some of the cable links use similar connectors and it is possible to cross the cables when
reconnecting. Label the cables, if necessary, to prevent mistakes during reconnection.
• Use care when connecting and disconnecting cables.

Some of the connectors are fragile. Note how the connectors fit, and pull or push them gently.
68P02902W76-B 7-11
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Removing the board
To remove a DAB2 board:

1. Isolate the power to the cabinet by switching off the six circuit breakers on the PDU. Then
remove the power input cables from the top of cabinet.
Do not continue with this procedure until the cabinet power is off!
2. Release the toggle catches that secure the front panel covering the PDU and DAB2 board.
3. Remove the front panel and place to one side.
4. Remove the 10 A inline fuse located to the right of the DAB2 board.
5. Unscrew the four TORX screws, which secure the DAB2 board and plastic protective cover,
and pull the board gently away from the cabinet.
Be careful when pulling on the alarm board. Try to pull from both
ends, rather than from the middle of the board. If possible, try
to rock the board free.
6. Disconnect the various connectors from the back of the board (see Figure 7-1) and place it
to one side.
There are several different types of cable connectors.
7-12 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Replacing the alarm board (DAB2)
DAB2 board
Figure 7-1 Distribution alarm board (DAB2) connectors
+27 V INPUT PL4 NOT USED

CONNECTOR
(J1)
LOWER DIGITAL CAGE
CONNECTORS A10
(PL2) & A11 (PL3)
INTERNAL FUNCTIONS
CONNECTOR (PL5)
68P02902W76-B 7-13
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Installing a new board
To install the new alarm board:

1. Set the switch positions for switch banks S1 and S2, on the new board, to reflect the settings of
S1 and S2 switch positions on the old board.
2. Connect the various cables removed in Step 6 of the removal procedure.
3. Press the board into the cabinet, ensuring it is correctly positioned.

Make sure the cables positioned behind the board are not stopping the board from being
secured correctly into place.
4. Place the protective plastic cover over the DAB2 board and secure, along with the DAB2
board, with the TORX screws removed in Step 5 of the removal procedure.
5. Replace the 10 A inline fuse removed in Step 4 of the removal procedure.
6. Replace the front panel removed in Step 3 of the removal procedure, and secure the toggle
switches to hold the panel in position.
7. Restore site power to the cabinet.
8. Switch on the six circuit breakers located on the front of the PDU.
7-14 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 Replacing the digital cage
Replacing the digital cage

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction
In exceptional circumstances, it may be necessary to replace the entire digital cage/backplane assembly within
a cabinet. This procedure explains how to replace the digital cage.
The procedure takes the cabinet out of service for about four hours. Motorola recommends performing this
procedure during hours of low traffic if possible.
Remember that cages connected to the unserviceable cage may still be operating.
Never look into any disconnected fibre optic cables or into fibre optic connectors,
as these may emit laser radiation harmful to eyesight.
Prerequisites
Contact Motorola with any questions about this procedure.

Replacing a cage is an extraordinary action. Therefore, these instructions assume the person(s) performing
this procedure are experienced in all aspects of site maintenance.
Motorola recommends reading through the entire procedure, including the various related texts and references,
before attempting to perform it.
68P02902W76-B 7-15
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Replacing the digital cage Chapter 7: Non FRU replacement procedures
Tools and equipment
The following tools and equipment are necessary to remove and replace the backplane:
• Torx drivers.
• Antistatic mat.
• Antistatic bags, or other containers suitable for storing digital boards, in quantities sufficient to
store all the boards in the cages(s).
• An approved earth strap.
• Labels and marking pens.
The digital cage is very reliable. Replacement is only necessary in certain limited circumstances.
Therefore, the Customer Network Resolution Centre (CNRC) Swindon must issue a Service Request
(SR) before Motorola will accept a cage or backplane for return. The SR shows that CNRC agreed to
the backplane replacement.
Do not attempt to remove or replace a cage until CNRC authorizes such action.
Procedure
Follow these steps to obtain an SR number:
1. Call the CNRC on +44 (0)1793 565444.
2. Describe the problem to the CNRC representative, and explain why cage replacement
is indicated.
Be prepared to describe:
1 What alarms/events/SWFMs accompanied the problem.
1 What diagnostic actions , if any, were taken, and the result of those actions.
1 What repair actions, if any, were taken, and the result of those actions.
7-16 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
CNRC review
The CNRC will review the problem and the steps taken so far. Depending on this review, the CNRC may
either:
• Suggest further tests or procedures before authorizing the digital cage replacement.
• Authorize replacing the cage, and issue an SR number.
Do not attempt to remove or replace a cage until CNRC authorizes such action.
If CNRC issues an SR number authorizing the cage replacement:

• Write the number down.
• Quote the SR number, in addition to the normal returns number, in any communications
with Motorola.
Motorola will not accept returned digital cages without CNRC authorization.
Removing the cage
Overview
This section contains three separate procedures:
• Preparing the cabinet explains how to set up the cabinet so that it is safe to work on the
digital cage.
• Disassembling the cage explains how to take the digital cage apart.
• Removing the cage explains how to take the digital cage out of the cabinet.
Perform these procedures in order, beginning with Preparing the cabinet.
68P02902W76-B 7-17
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02

Follow these steps to prepare the cabinet for digital cage replacement.
1. Determine which digital cage(s) need replacing.
It is probable that only one digital cage has a faulty backplane. Use the following table to
determine the appropriate actions.
If the faulty cage... Then:

does not contain the BSP... continue with Step 1.
• Reset the cabinet.

* CAUTION
Resetting the site stops call processing.
contains the BSP... Determine whether call processing is
occurring before deciding to reset the
site. Disable call processing at the site
before continuing with this procedure.
• Continue with Step 1.
1. Use the circuit breakers to disconnect power to the cage(s).
Be careful while working on the cabinet! There is danger of electric

burns and shock!
If both digital cages in a BSSC3 cabinet require replacement, proceed with Step 2.
If only one digital cage of a BSSC3 cabinet requires backplane replacement, leave the power
connected to the other, and proceed with Disassembling the cage.
Disabling one digital cage lets call processing continue, providing the second digital cage is
independent of the first. However, it also means dc power is still present in the cabinet.
2. Remove the supply voltage from the cabinet.
The digital cage is ready for disassembly.
7-18 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Disassembling the digital cage

To disassemble the digital cage:
Wear an approved earth strap when handling digital modules.

Use the antistatic mat and antistatic containers to store the digital modules.
1. Remove all the power supply modules from the digital cage.
Follow the procedure in Power supply module replacement in Chapter 3.
2. Remove all digital full and half size modules from the digital cage.
Put the digital modules into suitable antistatic packaging or storage containers. These modules
will go back into the digital cage.
3. Disconnect the dc supply to the fan assembly that corresponds to the digital cage being replaced.
4. Unscrew the fan assembly and remove it from the digital cage.
5. Disconnect the dc supply at the bottom of the digital cage.
6. Disconnect the MSI and Alarm board cables, and label the cables so they can be reconnected
properly.
The cables are at the top of the digital cage.
Do not drop the nuts or washers into the digital cage. Loose nuts
or washers can damage the cage and the components when the
cage is powered back up.
7. Note their respective positions and disconnect any fibre optic cables fitted to the digital cage.
The digital cage is ready for removal.
68P02902W76-B 7-19
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Removing the digital cage

To remove the digital cage.
1. Remove the eight front screws which attach the digital cage to the cabinet.
2. Lift the digital cage out and set it aside.
The digital cage is heavy:

• Lift carefully to avoid physical injury.
• Set the cage down carefully, to avoid further damage to the
cage, or damage to the site.
7-20 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Installing the digital cage
Installing the replacement digital cage

To replace the digital cage:
1. Lift the new digital cage / backplane assembly into the cabinet.
2. Secure the digital cage in place with the eight front screws
Equipping the digital cage

To equip the new digital cage with power and digital modules:
1. Connect the MSI and Alarm board cables.
The cables are at the top of the digital cage.
2. Reconnect any fibre optic cables if the digital cage is extended or expanded to other digital
cages.
3. Connect the dc supply at the bottom of the digital cage.
4. Connect the dc supply to the fan assembly.
5. Insert the fan assembly, and secure it to the cabinet with the front four screws.
6. Choose an action from the following table:
If... Then...
The upper digital cage is being replaced... secure the front cover plate below the fan
assembly, and continue with step Step 7.
The lower digital cage is being replaced... continue with step Step 7.
7. Insert all the digital full size and half size modules.
8. Insert the power supply modules.
68P02902W76-B 7-21
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Restoring power
Follow these steps to restore dc power to the cabinet.
1. Connect the power supply to the top of the cabinet.
2. Restore power to the digital cage(s) by resetting the circuit breakers.
3. Observe the LEDs on all the power supply modules, and choose an action from the following
table.
Valid Input Default

the green LED is lit on all the power supply continue with step Step 4.
modules...
the red LED is lit on all the power supply use Power supply module replacement
modules... in Chapter 3 to diagnose and correct the
problem.
the red LED is lit on any power supply Continue with step Step 4 when all the green
module... LEDs are lit.
4. Hard reset all the digital cards.

IMPORTANT
• Reset the GPROC2s last.
• Reset the GPROC2 in slot 20 last of all.

Step Action: Result:
1.
2. Flip the switch on each The board is taken out of
digital card up to the RESET service (OOS).
position.
3. Release the switch. The card resets automatically.
7-22 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Checking connections
Follow these steps to check the connections between the digital cage and the rest of the system.
1. Connect a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) to the TTY port on the master GPROC2.
2. Verify the connection to the OMC-R.
The site will take about one hour to code load and initialize.
3. Verify that all site Message Transfer Links (MTLs) and Operations and Maintenance Links
(OMLs) are operational.
1 To verify the MTLs, type:
state 0 MTL x 0 0,
where x is the MTL identifier.
1 To verify the OML, type:

state 0 OML x y 0,
where x and y are the OML identifiers.
The status for the MTL and the OML should be
<busy, unlocked>
. If it is not, further diagnosis is necessary.
68P02902W76-B 7-23
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
7-24 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Chapter
8
Parts Information
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
68P02902W76-B 8-1
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
BSSC3 cabinet parts lists Chapter 8: Parts Information
BSSC3 cabinet parts lists

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Introduction to BSSC3 cabinet parts lists
This chapter shows the replacement parts that may be ordered for the BSSC3 cabinet. Each item shown
consists of a description and a part number, which uniquely identifies the required component. Some items
are used in different equipment in addition to the BSSC3 cabinet. Many items are the same for the BSSC3
cabinet used as a BSC2 and the BSSC3 cabinet used as an RXCDR.
These parts lists contain the latest information available at the date of publication of this manual.
If a part number for any item is marked TBA, this means that a number had not been allocated
at that time. Please refer to the on-line ordering guide or contact the Motorola local office for
the latest information regarding such items.
FRU items
The items listed in these sections are separated into FRUs and spares. It is not intended to supply sub-units
of these spares.
Ordering method
Contact the local Motorola office for ordering information, including cost and delivery.
Motorola reserves the right to change the design of the product without notice. The information
provided in this chapter is intended as a guide. If you require the latest information, contact the
Motorola local office, who will be able to confirm the latest situation.
Some items are produced by more than one manufacturer, so that a replacement may appear
different to the item it is replacing. All items bearing the same order number, regardless of
manufacturer, are fully compatible.
8-2 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 BSSC3 parts lists
BSSC3 parts lists

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BSSC3 cabinet
BSSC3 cabinet details are shown in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1 BSC2/RXCDR2
Part number Item Quantity

SW9253 BSSC3 cabinet kit 1
To create an RXCDR2 cabinet, add RXU3 card cages and cabinet power supplies.
To create a BSC2 cabinet, add BSU3 card cages, cabinet PSUs and one card cage power adapter.
Table 8-2 Adapter cable
Part number Item Quantity

SWLN9203 +27v cable 1
68P02902W76-B 8-3
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
BSSC3 parts lists Chapter 8: Parts Information
BSSC3 cabinet FRUs
Table 8-3 shows replacement FRUs available for the BSSC3 cabinet.
Table 8-3 BSSC3 FRUs
Part Number Item Quantity

SWLN4025 CIM interface module 1
SWLN4024 BIM2 interface module 1
SLN7130 GCLK generic clock 1
SLN7139 CLKX clock extender 1
SGLN4293 GPROC2 generic processor 1
SWLN9251 GPROC3 generic processor 1
SLN7131 KSW kiloport switch 1
SGLN6118 DSW2 double kiloport switch 1
SLN7136 KSWX kiloport switch extender 1
SGLN5731 DSWX double kiloport switch 1
extender
SLN7134 MSI multiple serial interface 1
SWLN7167 GDP full rate 1
SWLN4485 GDP enhanced full rate 1
SWLN8988 GDP2 full rate 1
SWLN5491 NVM non-volatile memory board 1
SLN7138 LANX LAN extender 1
SLN7135 PIX parallel interface extender 1
board
SWPN1021 +27 V EPSM power supply 1
SWPN9262 -48 V/-60 V IPSM2 power supply 1
SWLN8595 FAN 1
8-4 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2 BSSC3 parts lists
BSSC3 cabinet spares
Table 8-4 shows replacement spares available for the BSSC3 cabinet.
Table 8-4 BSSC3 spares
Part Number Item Quantity

SWLN4653 BSU3 shelf (includes 1 LANX 1
module)
SWLN9261 RXU3 shelf (includes 1 LANX 1
module)
SWLN7402 BTC module 1
SWLN9011 DAB2 board 1
SVEN6321A Fan unit kit 1
BSSC3 cabinet cables
Table 8-5 shows replacement cables available for the BSSC3 cabinet.
Table 8-5 Optical cables
Parameter Valid Input Default

SKN4438 Fibre optic cable (10 m) 1
SKN4439 Fibre optic cable (15 m) 1
68P02902W76-B 8-5
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
BSSC3 parts lists Chapter 8: Parts Information
8-6 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Index
Index
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
A
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Air filter Alarms

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 DAB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
B
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
battery BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

lithium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
BIM2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 BSU card cage
BSSC3 compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 BSU shelf
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 slot assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 BTC
BSSC3 cabinet module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
external view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
internal view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Buffered test ports
signal cabling diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 GCLK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Calibration CLKX (contd.)

GCLK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Clock control/alarm logic
CD-ROMs, ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 GCLK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Checklist Colocation
annual physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
CIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Compatibility
Circuit breakers card cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Configurations
CLKX BSSC3 cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
non-redundant module replacement . . . . . . 6-10 cross references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
redundant module replacement . . . . . . . . 6-7
68P02902W76-B IX-1
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Index
D
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DAB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Digital modules

alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 front panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
LEDs Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
LEDs and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 DSW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
switch configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 double rate TDM bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
data encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
DC power highway configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
wiring diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 local highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
digital cage outbound highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 remote highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
digital modules self diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
full size slot positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
GDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64 DSWX
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58 expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
half size local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
DSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80 non-redundant module replacement . . . . . . 6-34
KSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84 redundant module replacement . . . . . . . . 6-30
remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
E
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 enhanced power supply module (EPSM) . . . . . 2-22

encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
F
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Fan unit full size digital modules

replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54 GDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
feature references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Fuses
tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 DAB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
G
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GCLK GDP2 (contd.)

calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
non-redundant module replacement . . . . . . 6-13 slot positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
redundant module replacement . . . . . . . . 6-11 software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Generic DSP processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
GDP GMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 GMR amendments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 to 17
technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64 availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
GDP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 instructions for. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 record for this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IX-2 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004
Index
GPROC2 GPROC3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

BSC2 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 BSC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
RXCDR2 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
RXCDR functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
H
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
half size digital modules Half size digital modules

KSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
I
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
integrated power supply module (IPSM) . . . . . 2-29 Interface board (contd.)

Interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Interface board IPSM2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
K
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
kiloport switch extender (KSWX) . . . . . . . . 3-84 KSW (contd.)

KSW technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
redundant module replacement . . . . . . . . 6-25 KSWX
replacement procedure non-redundant module replacement . . . . . . 6-34
non-redundant modules . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 redundant module replacement . . . . . . . . 6-30
L
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Labels LANX (contd.)

cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 redundant module replacement . . . . . . . . 6-35
LANX technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
non-redundant module replacement . . . . . . 6-39 lifting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
M
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
manuals, ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 MSI

module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
multiple serial interface (MSI). . . . . . . . . . 3-58
N
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
NVM NVM (contd.)

mechanical design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72 technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
68P02902W76-B IX-3
28 Jul 2004 GMR-02
Index
O
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
P
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
parts substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

PIX Power supply
module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48 module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94 power supply modules
Power consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 EPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Power distribution unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 IPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
R
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Reference dividers Repair (contd.)

GCLK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Reference encoders RXU3
GCLK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 CIM/BIM connection diagram . . . . . . . . 2-55
Reference fail detect modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
GCLK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 RXU3 card cage
Reference oscillator compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
GCLK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 RXU3 shelf
Repair slot assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
S
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
safety issues Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 static
telephone numbers for reporting. . . . . . . . . 6 devices susceptible to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Shelf ID handling techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
LANX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92 discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Site reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Status indicators
special key sequences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
T
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Testing transcoder (GDP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64

equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
W
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 warnings (contd.)

failure to comply with . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 labels for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
IX-4 68P02902W76-B
GMR-02 28 Jul 2004

Контроллер BSC 68p02902w76-b-02

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Контроллер BSC 68p02902w76-b-02

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

Motorola manual affected

Reason for revision

Motorola service web

28 Jul 2004 Service Manual: BSC2/RXCDR2 GMR Page 1

GMR Page 2 Service Manual: BSC2/RXCDR2 28 Jul 2004

© 2002-2004 Motorola, Inc. 68P02902W76-B

GMR-02 28 Jul 2004

Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2

Chapter 1: Equipment overview and specifications

Chapter 2: BSSC3 cabinet description

Chapter 3: Digital modules

BTC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

BSC GPROC3 functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Half-size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76

Chapter 4: Introduction to maintenance

Site definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Chapter 5: Routine maintenance

Chapter 6: FRU replacement procedures

BIM2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Chapter 7: Non FRU replacement procedures

Replacing the alarm board (DAB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Chapter 8: Parts Information

Figure 1-1: BSSC3 cabinet (external view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Figure 3-17: KSW block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Table 1: Manual version history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

This page intentionally left blank.

Service Manual - BSC2/RXCDR2

What is Covered In This Manual?

The objectives of this manual are to help the reader:

• Understand the function and operation of all components.

• Understand haw to inspect, maintain and repair the equipment.

For installation and commissioning information refer to Installation and Configuration:

Issue status of this manual

Table 1 Manual version history

Resolution of service requests

The following Service Requests are now resolved in this manual:

Table 2 Service requests resolved in this manual

Failure to comply with Motorola’s operation, installation and maintenance

The tags are positioned in text as follows:

New and amended feature information Tag position in text

• Full sections under a main heading. • Main heading.

• Full paragraphs under subheadings. • Subheading.

Special key sequences

CTRL-c Press the Control and c keys at the same time.

Reporting safety issues

Procedure 1 Safety issue reporting

1 Make the equipment concerned safe, for example by removing power.

Warnings and cautions

A definition and example follow below:

Example and format

Failure to comply with warnings

A definition and example follow below:

Example and format

• Potentially hazardous voltage.

Potentially hazardous voltage

Motorola GSM equipment does not utilise high voltages.

High RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in this equipment

When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, a

Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of

Lithium batteries, if subjected to mistreatment, may burst and ignite. Defective

Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices. These metal oxide semiconductor

Devices sensitive to static

Special handling techniques